root/include/net/mac80211.h

/* [<][>][^][v][top][bottom][index][help] */

INCLUDED FROM


DEFINITIONS

This source file includes following definitions.
  1. ieee80211_rate_set_vht
  2. ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs
  3. ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss
  4. IEEE80211_SKB_CB
  5. IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB
  6. ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status
  7. ieee80211_vif_is_mesh
  8. _ieee80211_hw_check
  9. _ieee80211_hw_set
  10. SET_IEEE80211_DEV
  11. SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR
  12. ieee80211_get_tx_rate
  13. ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate
  14. ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate
  15. ieee80211_alloc_hw
  16. ieee80211_get_tx_led_name
  17. ieee80211_get_rx_led_name
  18. ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name
  19. ieee80211_get_radio_led_name
  20. ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger
  21. ieee80211_rx
  22. ieee80211_rx_ni
  23. ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni
  24. ieee80211_tx_status_noskb
  25. ieee80211_tx_status_ni
  26. ieee80211_beacon_get
  27. ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k
  28. ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces
  29. ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl
  30. ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl
  31. rate_supported
  32. rate_lowest_index
  33. rate_usable_index_exists
  34. conf_is_ht20
  35. conf_is_ht40_minus
  36. conf_is_ht40_plus
  37. conf_is_ht40
  38. conf_is_ht
  39. ieee80211_iftype_p2p
  40. ieee80211_vif_type_p2p
  41. ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni
  42. ieee80211_txq_schedule_end
  43. ieee80211_schedule_txq
  44. ieee80211_return_txq

   1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
   2 /*
   3  * mac80211 <-> driver interface
   4  *
   5  * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
   6  * Copyright 2006-2007  Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
   7  * Copyright 2007-2010  Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
   8  * Copyright 2013-2014  Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
   9  * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
  10  * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2019 Intel Corporation
  11  */
  12 
  13 #ifndef MAC80211_H
  14 #define MAC80211_H
  15 
  16 #include <linux/bug.h>
  17 #include <linux/kernel.h>
  18 #include <linux/if_ether.h>
  19 #include <linux/skbuff.h>
  20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h>
  21 #include <net/cfg80211.h>
  22 #include <net/codel.h>
  23 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
  24 #include <asm/unaligned.h>
  25 
  26 /**
  27  * DOC: Introduction
  28  *
  29  * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
  30  * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
  31  * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
  32  * drivers.
  33  */
  34 
  35 /**
  36  * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
  37  *
  38  * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
  39  * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
  40  * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
  41  * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
  42  * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
  43  * tasklet function.
  44  *
  45  * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
  46  *       use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
  47  */
  48 
  49 /**
  50  * DOC: Warning
  51  *
  52  * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
  53  * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
  54  */
  55 
  56 /**
  57  * DOC: Frame format
  58  *
  59  * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
  60  * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
  61  * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
  62  * hardware.
  63  *
  64  * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
  65  *
  66  * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
  67  * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
  68  *
  69  * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
  70  * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
  71  */
  72 
  73 /**
  74  * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
  75  *
  76  * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
  77  * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
  78  * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
  79  * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
  80  *
  81  * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
  82  * suspend.
  83  *
  84  * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
  85  *
  86  */
  87 
  88 /**
  89  * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
  90  *
  91  * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
  92  * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
  93  * between different stations/interfaces.
  94  * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
  95  * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
  96  * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
  97  *
  98  * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
  99  * driver operation.
 100  *
 101  * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
 102  * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
 103  * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
 104  *
 105  * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
 106  * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
 107  *
 108  * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
 109  * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
 110  * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
 111  *
 112  * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
 113  * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
 114  * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
 115  * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
 116  * ieee80211_return_txq().
 117  *
 118  * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
 119  * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
 120  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
 121  * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
 122  * .release_buffered_frames().
 123  * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
 124  * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
 125  * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
 126  */
 127 
 128 struct device;
 129 
 130 /**
 131  * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
 132  *
 133  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
 134  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
 135  */
 136 enum ieee80211_max_queues {
 137         IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES =          16,
 138         IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP =       BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
 139 };
 140 
 141 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE        0xff
 142 
 143 /**
 144  * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
 145  * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
 146  * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
 147  * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
 148  * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
 149  */
 150 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
 151         IEEE80211_AC_VO         = 0,
 152         IEEE80211_AC_VI         = 1,
 153         IEEE80211_AC_BE         = 2,
 154         IEEE80211_AC_BK         = 3,
 155 };
 156 
 157 /**
 158  * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
 159  *
 160  * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
 161  * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
 162  *
 163  * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
 164  * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
 165  *      2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
 166  * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
 167  * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
 168  * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
 169  * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
 170  * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
 171  * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
 172  */
 173 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
 174         u16 txop;
 175         u16 cw_min;
 176         u16 cw_max;
 177         u8 aifs;
 178         bool acm;
 179         bool uapsd;
 180         bool mu_edca;
 181         struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
 182 };
 183 
 184 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
 185         unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
 186         unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
 187         unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
 188         unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
 189 };
 190 
 191 /**
 192  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
 193  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
 194  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
 195  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
 196  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
 197  *      this is used only with channel switching with CSA
 198  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
 199  */
 200 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
 201         IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH          = BIT(0),
 202         IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS      = BIT(1),
 203         IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR          = BIT(2),
 204         IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL        = BIT(3),
 205         IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH      = BIT(4),
 206 };
 207 
 208 /**
 209  * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
 210  *
 211  * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
 212  * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
 213  *
 214  * @def: the channel definition
 215  * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
 216  * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
 217  *      active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
 218  * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
 219  *      after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
 220  *      this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
 221  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
 222  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
 223  *      sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
 224  */
 225 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
 226         struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
 227         struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
 228 
 229         u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
 230 
 231         bool radar_enabled;
 232 
 233         u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
 234 };
 235 
 236 /**
 237  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
 238  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
 239  *      exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
 240  *      needs to be switched from one to the other.
 241  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
 242  *      to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
 243  *      will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
 244  *      from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
 245  *      implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
 246  *      hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
 247  *      will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
 248  *      for changes/removal.)
 249  */
 250 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
 251         CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
 252         CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
 253 };
 254 
 255 /**
 256  * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
 257  *
 258  * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
 259  * needs to switch from one chanctx to another.  The
 260  * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
 261  * done.
 262  *
 263  * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
 264  * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
 265  * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
 266  */
 267 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
 268         struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
 269         struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
 270         struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
 271 };
 272 
 273 /**
 274  * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
 275  *
 276  * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
 277  * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
 278  *
 279  * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
 280  *      also implies a change in the AID.
 281  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
 282  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
 283  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
 284  * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
 285  * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
 286  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
 287  * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
 288  *      reason (IBSS and managed mode)
 289  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
 290  *      new beacon (beaconing modes)
 291  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
 292  *      enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
 293  * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
 294  * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
 295  * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
 296  * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
 297  *      that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
 298  * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
 299  * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
 300  * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
 301  * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
 302  * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
 303  * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
 304  *      changed
 305  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
 306  *      currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
 307  * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
 308  *      note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
 309  *      context had been assigned.
 310  * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
 311  * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
 312  * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
 313  *      keep alive) changed.
 314  * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
 315  * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fime timing reasurement request responder
 316  *      functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
 317  * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
 318  * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
 319  *
 320  */
 321 enum ieee80211_bss_change {
 322         BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC               = 1<<0,
 323         BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT        = 1<<1,
 324         BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE        = 1<<2,
 325         BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT            = 1<<3,
 326         BSS_CHANGED_HT                  = 1<<4,
 327         BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES         = 1<<5,
 328         BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT          = 1<<6,
 329         BSS_CHANGED_BSSID               = 1<<7,
 330         BSS_CHANGED_BEACON              = 1<<8,
 331         BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED      = 1<<9,
 332         BSS_CHANGED_CQM                 = 1<<10,
 333         BSS_CHANGED_IBSS                = 1<<11,
 334         BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER          = 1<<12,
 335         BSS_CHANGED_QOS                 = 1<<13,
 336         BSS_CHANGED_IDLE                = 1<<14,
 337         BSS_CHANGED_SSID                = 1<<15,
 338         BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP       = 1<<16,
 339         BSS_CHANGED_PS                  = 1<<17,
 340         BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER             = 1<<18,
 341         BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS              = 1<<19,
 342         BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO         = 1<<20,
 343         BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH           = 1<<21,
 344         BSS_CHANGED_OCB                 = 1<<22,
 345         BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS           = 1<<23,
 346         BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE          = 1<<24,
 347         BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE          = 1<<25,
 348         BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER       = 1<<26,
 349         BSS_CHANGED_TWT                 = 1<<27,
 350         BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD          = 1<<28,
 351 
 352         /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
 353 };
 354 
 355 /*
 356  * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
 357  * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
 358  * filtering will be disabled.
 359  */
 360 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
 361 
 362 /**
 363  * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
 364  * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
 365  * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
 366  * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
 367  * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
 368  *      they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
 369  *      once each time the timeout triggers.
 370  */
 371 enum ieee80211_event_type {
 372         RSSI_EVENT,
 373         MLME_EVENT,
 374         BAR_RX_EVENT,
 375         BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
 376 };
 377 
 378 /**
 379  * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
 380  * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
 381  * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
 382  */
 383 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
 384         RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
 385         RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
 386 };
 387 
 388 /**
 389  * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
 390  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
 391  */
 392 struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
 393         enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
 394 };
 395 
 396 /**
 397  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
 398  * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
 399  * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
 400  * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
 401  * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
 402  */
 403 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
 404         AUTH_EVENT,
 405         ASSOC_EVENT,
 406         DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
 407         DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
 408 };
 409 
 410 /**
 411  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
 412  * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
 413  * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
 414  * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
 415  */
 416 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
 417         MLME_SUCCESS,
 418         MLME_DENIED,
 419         MLME_TIMEOUT,
 420 };
 421 
 422 /**
 423  * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
 424  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
 425  * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
 426  * @reason: the reason code if applicable
 427  */
 428 struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
 429         enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
 430         enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
 431         u16 reason;
 432 };
 433 
 434 /**
 435  * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
 436  * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
 437  * @tid: the tid
 438  * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
 439  */
 440 struct ieee80211_ba_event {
 441         struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
 442         u16 tid;
 443         u16 ssn;
 444 };
 445 
 446 /**
 447  * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
 448  * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
 449  * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
 450  * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
 451  * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
 452  * @u:union holding the fields above
 453  */
 454 struct ieee80211_event {
 455         enum ieee80211_event_type type;
 456         union {
 457                 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
 458                 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
 459                 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
 460         } u;
 461 };
 462 
 463 /**
 464  * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
 465  *
 466  * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
 467  *
 468  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
 469  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
 470  */
 471 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
 472         u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
 473         u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
 474 };
 475 
 476 /**
 477  * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
 478  *
 479  * @lci: LCI subelement content
 480  * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
 481  * @lci_len: LCI data length
 482  * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
 483  */
 484 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
 485         const u8 *lci;
 486         const u8 *civicloc;
 487         size_t lci_len;
 488         size_t civicloc_len;
 489 };
 490 
 491 /**
 492  * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
 493  *
 494  * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
 495  * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
 496  *
 497  * @bss_color: 6-bit value to mark inter-BSS frame, if BSS supports HE
 498  * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
 499  * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
 500  * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
 501  * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
 502  *      ACK, BACK or both
 503  * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
 504  * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
 505  * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
 506  * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
 507  *      mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
 508  * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
 509  *      mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
 510  * @assoc: association status
 511  * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
 512  *      or not
 513  * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
 514  * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
 515  * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
 516  * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
 517  * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
 518  * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
 519  *      valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
 520  *      with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
 521  * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
 522  *      as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
 523  *      HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
 524  *      only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
 525  *      association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
 526  *      %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
 527  * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
 528  *      the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
 529  *      (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
 530  * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
 531  *      is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
 532  *      IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
 533  *      by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
 534  *      guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
 535  * @beacon_int: beacon interval
 536  * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
 537  * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
 538  *      index into the rate table configured by the driver in
 539  *      the current band.
 540  * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
 541  * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
 542  * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
 543  * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
 544  * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
 545  *      configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
 546  * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
 547  * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
 548  *      This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
 549  *      Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
 550  *      be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
 551  * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
 552  *      implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
 553  *      cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
 554  *      relation to the newly configured threshold.
 555  * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
 556  *      implies disabled.  This is an alternative mechanism to the single
 557  *      threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
 558  * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
 559  * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
 560  * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
 561  *      may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
 562  *      The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
 563  *      to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
 564  * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
 565  *      may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
 566  *      array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
 567  * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
 568  * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
 569  *      hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
 570  *      your driver/device needs to do.
 571  * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
 572  *      offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
 573  * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
 574  * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
 575  * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
 576  * @txpower: TX power in dBm
 577  * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
 578  *      Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
 579  *      TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
 580  *      NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
 581  *      userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
 582  *      NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
 583  * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
 584  * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
 585  *      to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
 586  *      if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
 587  * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
 588  *      transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
 589  *      In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
 590  *      a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
 591  * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
 592  *      protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
 593  *      station.
 594  * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
 595  *      responder functionality.
 596  * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
 597  * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
 598  * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
 599  * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
 600  * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
 601  * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
 602  *      nontransmitted BSSIDs
 603  * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
 604  *      in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
 605  * @he_operation: HE operation information of the AP we are connected to
 606  * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
 607  */
 608 struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
 609         const u8 *bssid;
 610         u8 bss_color;
 611         u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
 612         bool multi_sta_back_32bit;
 613         bool uora_exists;
 614         bool ack_enabled;
 615         u8 uora_ocw_range;
 616         u16 frame_time_rts_th;
 617         bool he_support;
 618         bool twt_requester;
 619         bool twt_responder;
 620         /* association related data */
 621         bool assoc, ibss_joined;
 622         bool ibss_creator;
 623         u16 aid;
 624         /* erp related data */
 625         bool use_cts_prot;
 626         bool use_short_preamble;
 627         bool use_short_slot;
 628         bool enable_beacon;
 629         u8 dtim_period;
 630         u16 beacon_int;
 631         u16 assoc_capability;
 632         u64 sync_tsf;
 633         u32 sync_device_ts;
 634         u8 sync_dtim_count;
 635         u32 basic_rates;
 636         struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
 637         int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
 638         u16 ht_operation_mode;
 639         s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
 640         u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
 641         s32 cqm_rssi_low;
 642         s32 cqm_rssi_high;
 643         struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
 644         struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
 645         __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
 646         int arp_addr_cnt;
 647         bool qos;
 648         bool idle;
 649         bool ps;
 650         u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
 651         size_t ssid_len;
 652         bool hidden_ssid;
 653         int txpower;
 654         enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
 655         struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
 656         bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
 657         u16 max_idle_period;
 658         bool protected_keep_alive;
 659         bool ftm_responder;
 660         struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
 661         /* Multiple BSSID data */
 662         bool nontransmitted;
 663         u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
 664         u8 bssid_index;
 665         u8 bssid_indicator;
 666         bool ema_ap;
 667         u8 profile_periodicity;
 668         struct ieee80211_he_operation he_operation;
 669         struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
 670 };
 671 
 672 /**
 673  * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
 674  *
 675  * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
 676  *
 677  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
 678  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
 679  *      number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
 680  *      number and increasing the sequence number only when the
 681  *      IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
 682  *      assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
 683  *      for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
 684  *      that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
 685  *      If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
 686  *      assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
 687  *      802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
 688  *      beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
 689  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
 690  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
 691  *      station
 692  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
 693  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
 694  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
 695  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
 696  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
 697  *      because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
 698  *      avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
 699  *      firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
 700  *      went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
 701  *      the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
 702  *      that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
 703  *      since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
 704  *      hardware queue.
 705  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
 706  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
 707  *      is for the whole aggregation.
 708  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
 709  *      so consider using block ack request (BAR).
 710  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
 711  *      set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
 712  *      be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
 713  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
 714  *      that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
 715  *      off-channel operation.
 716  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
 717  *      used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
 718  *      it can be sent out.
 719  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
 720  *      used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
 721  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
 722  *      used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
 723  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
 724  *      frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
 725  *      be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
 726  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
 727  *      transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
 728  *      by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
 729  *      queue gets full.
 730  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
 731  *      after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
 732  *      be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
 733  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
 734  *      code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
 735  *      should kick the MLME state machine.
 736  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
 737  *      MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
 738  *      status to user space)
 739  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
 740  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
 741  *      frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
 742  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
 743  *      the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
 744  *      in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
 745  *      handled properly by the device.
 746  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
 747  *      testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
 748  *      TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
 749  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
 750  *      This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
 751  *      frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
 752  * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
 753  *      when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
 754  *      an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
 755  *      the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
 756  *      PS-Poll responses.
 757  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
 758  *      This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
 759  *      the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
 760  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
 761  *      would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
 762  *      monitor injection).
 763  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
 764  *      IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
 765  *      any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
 766  *      This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
 767  *      behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
 768  *
 769  * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
 770  *       forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
 771  */
 772 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
 773         IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS          = BIT(0),
 774         IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ             = BIT(1),
 775         IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK                 = BIT(2),
 776         IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT          = BIT(3),
 777         IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT         = BIT(4),
 778         IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM        = BIT(5),
 779         IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU                  = BIT(6),
 780         IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED               = BIT(7),
 781         IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED           = BIT(8),
 782         IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK                   = BIT(9),
 783         IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU                 = BIT(10),
 784         IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK         = BIT(11),
 785         IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE        = BIT(12),
 786         IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK        = BIT(13),
 787         IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING    = BIT(14),
 788         IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED              = BIT(15),
 789         IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT         = BIT(16),
 790         IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER           = BIT(17),
 791         IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES            = BIT(18),
 792         IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION       = BIT(19),
 793         IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX         = BIT(20),
 794         IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX     = BIT(21),
 795         IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC                   = BIT(22),
 796         IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC                   = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
 797         IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN             = BIT(25),
 798         IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE     = BIT(26),
 799         IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE            = BIT(27),
 800         IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP                = BIT(28),
 801         IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE            = BIT(29),
 802         IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG               = BIT(30),
 803         IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED     = BIT(31),
 804 };
 805 
 806 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT             23
 807 
 808 /**
 809  * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
 810  *
 811  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
 812  *      protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
 813  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
 814  *      frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
 815  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
 816  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
 817  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
 818  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
 819  *
 820  * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
 821  */
 822 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
 823         IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO       = BIT(0),
 824         IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE           = BIT(1),
 825         IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT           = BIT(2),
 826         IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU                 = BIT(3),
 827         IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT             = BIT(4),
 828         IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP     = BIT(5),
 829 };
 830 
 831 /*
 832  * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
 833  * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
 834  */
 835 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK |               \
 836         IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT |    \
 837         IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU |           \
 838         IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK |               \
 839         IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK |           \
 840         IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER |    \
 841         IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC |                \
 842         IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
 843 
 844 /**
 845  * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
 846  *      Rate Control algorithm.
 847  *
 848  * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
 849  * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
 850  *
 851  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
 852  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
 853  *      This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
 854  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
 855  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
 856  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
 857  *      into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
 858  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
 859  *      Greenfield mode.
 860  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
 861  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
 862  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
 863  *      (80+80 isn't supported yet)
 864  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
 865  *      adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
 866  *      NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
 867  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
 868  */
 869 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
 870         IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS             = BIT(0),
 871         IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT         = BIT(1),
 872         IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE      = BIT(2),
 873 
 874         /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
 875         IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS                     = BIT(3),
 876         IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD             = BIT(4),
 877         IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH            = BIT(5),
 878         IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA                = BIT(6),
 879         IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI                = BIT(7),
 880         IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS                 = BIT(8),
 881         IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH            = BIT(9),
 882         IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH           = BIT(10),
 883 };
 884 
 885 
 886 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
 887 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
 888 
 889 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
 890 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
 891 
 892 /* maximum number of rate stages */
 893 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES  4
 894 
 895 /* maximum number of rate table entries */
 896 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE    4
 897 
 898 /**
 899  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
 900  *
 901  * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
 902  * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
 903  * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
 904  *
 905  * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
 906  * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
 907  *
 908  * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
 909  * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
 910  *
 911  * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
 912  * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
 913  * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
 914  * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
 915  * information::
 916  *
 917  *    { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
 918  *
 919  * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
 920  * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
 921  * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
 922  * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
 923  * information should then contain::
 924  *
 925  *   { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
 926  *
 927  * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
 928  * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
 929  */
 930 struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
 931         s8 idx;
 932         u16 count:5,
 933             flags:11;
 934 } __packed;
 935 
 936 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY          31
 937 
 938 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
 939                                           u8 mcs, u8 nss)
 940 {
 941         WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
 942         WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
 943         rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
 944 }
 945 
 946 static inline u8
 947 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
 948 {
 949         return rate->idx & 0xF;
 950 }
 951 
 952 static inline u8
 953 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
 954 {
 955         return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
 956 }
 957 
 958 /**
 959  * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
 960  *
 961  * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
 962  *  (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
 963  *  (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
 964  *  (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
 965  *
 966  * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
 967  * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
 968  * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
 969  * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
 970  * @control: union part for control data
 971  * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
 972  * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
 973  * @control.use_rts: use RTS
 974  * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
 975  * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
 976  * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
 977  * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
 978  * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
 979  * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
 980  * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
 981  * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
 982  * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
 983  * @pad: padding
 984  * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
 985  * @status: union part for status data
 986  * @status.rates: attempted rates
 987  * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
 988  * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
 989  * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
 990  * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
 991  * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission
 992  * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid
 993  * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
 994  * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
 995  * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
 996  * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
 997  * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
 998  *      relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
 999  * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
1000  *      relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1001  * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
1002  */
1003 struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1004         /* common information */
1005         u32 flags;
1006         u8 band;
1007 
1008         u8 hw_queue;
1009 
1010         u16 ack_frame_id;
1011 
1012         union {
1013                 struct {
1014                         union {
1015                                 /* rate control */
1016                                 struct {
1017                                         struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1018                                                 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1019                                         s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1020                                         u8 use_rts:1;
1021                                         u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1022                                         u8 short_preamble:1;
1023                                         u8 skip_table:1;
1024                                         /* 2 bytes free */
1025                                 };
1026                                 /* only needed before rate control */
1027                                 unsigned long jiffies;
1028                         };
1029                         /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1030                         struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1031                         struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1032                         u32 flags;
1033                         codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1034                 } control;
1035                 struct {
1036                         u64 cookie;
1037                 } ack;
1038                 struct {
1039                         struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1040                         s32 ack_signal;
1041                         u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1042                         u8 ampdu_len;
1043                         u8 antenna;
1044                         u16 tx_time;
1045                         bool is_valid_ack_signal;
1046                         void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
1047                 } status;
1048                 struct {
1049                         struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1050                                 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1051                         u8 pad[4];
1052 
1053                         void *rate_driver_data[
1054                                 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1055                 };
1056                 void *driver_data[
1057                         IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1058         };
1059 };
1060 
1061 /**
1062  * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx staus info for rate control
1063  *
1064  * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1065  * @info: Basic tx status information
1066  * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1067  * @rate: The TX rate that was used when sending the packet
1068  */
1069 struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1070         struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1071         struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1072         struct sk_buff *skb;
1073         struct rate_info *rate;
1074 };
1075 
1076 /**
1077  * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1078  *
1079  * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1080  * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1081  * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1082  *
1083  * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1084  * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1085  * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1086  * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1087  */
1088 struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1089         const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1090         size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1091         const u8 *common_ies;
1092         size_t common_ie_len;
1093 };
1094 
1095 
1096 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1097 {
1098         return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1099 }
1100 
1101 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1102 {
1103         return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1104 }
1105 
1106 /**
1107  * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1108  *
1109  * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1110  *
1111  * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1112  * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1113  * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1114  * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1115  *
1116  * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1117  *       info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1118  *       instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1119  */
1120 static inline void
1121 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1122 {
1123         int i;
1124 
1125         BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1126                      offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1127         BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1128                      offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1129         BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1130         /* clear the rate counts */
1131         for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1132                 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1133 
1134         BUILD_BUG_ON(
1135             offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
1136         memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1137                sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1138                offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1139 }
1140 
1141 
1142 /**
1143  * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1144  *
1145  * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1146  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1147  *      Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1148  * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1149  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1150  *      verification has been done by the hardware.
1151  * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1152  *      If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1153  *      hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1154  * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1155  *      flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1156  *      Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1157  *      is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1158  * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1159  *      de-duplication by itself.
1160  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1161  *      the frame.
1162  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1163  *      the frame.
1164  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1165  *      field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1166  *      was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1167  *      merging.
1168  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1169  *      field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1170  *      (including FCS) was received.
1171  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1172  *      field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1173  * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1174  *      Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1175  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1176  *      number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1177  *      each A-MPDU
1178  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1179  *      subframes of a single A-MPDU
1180  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1181  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1182  *      on this subframe
1183  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1184  *      is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1185  * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1186  *      done by the hardware
1187  * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1188  *      processing it in any regular way.
1189  *      This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1190  *      them for sniffing purposes.
1191  * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1192  *      monitor interfaces.
1193  *      This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1194  *      them for sniffing purposes.
1195  * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1196  *      subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1197  *      All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1198  *      if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1199  *      the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1200  *      deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1201  *      subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1202  *      either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1203  *      interleaved with other frames.
1204  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1205  *      radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1206  *      the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1207  * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1208  *      This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1209  *      the first subframe.
1210  * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1211  *      be done in the hardware.
1212  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1213  *      frame
1214  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1215  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1216  *      (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1217  *      
1218  *       - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1219  *       - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1220  *       - DATA3_CODING
1221  *       - DATA5_GI
1222  *       - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1223  *       - DATA6_NSTS
1224  *       - DATA3_STBC
1225  *      
1226  *      from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1227  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1228  *      (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1229  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1230  * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1231  *      the "0-length PSDU" field included there.  The value for it is
1232  *      in &struct ieee80211_rx_status.  Note that if this value isn't
1233  *      known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1234  */
1235 enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1236         RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR              = BIT(0),
1237         RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED               = BIT(1),
1238         RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START      = BIT(2),
1239         RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED           = BIT(3),
1240         RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED             = BIT(4),
1241         RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC          = BIT(5),
1242         RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC         = BIT(6),
1243         RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START           = BIT(7),
1244         RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL           = BIT(8),
1245         RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS           = BIT(9),
1246         RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED            = BIT(10),
1247         RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED           = BIT(11),
1248         RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN        = BIT(12),
1249         RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST           = BIT(13),
1250         RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR   = BIT(14),
1251         RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN   = BIT(15),
1252         RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END             = BIT(16),
1253         RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR            = BIT(17),
1254         RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR            = BIT(18),
1255         RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE              = BIT(19),
1256         RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA    = BIT(20),
1257         RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED            = BIT(21),
1258         RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN           = BIT(22),
1259         RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED            = BIT(23),
1260         RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT           = BIT(24),
1261         RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN     = BIT(25),
1262         RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE             = BIT(26),
1263         RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU          = BIT(27),
1264         RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG           = BIT(28),
1265         RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU                 = BIT(29),
1266 };
1267 
1268 /**
1269  * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1270  *
1271  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1272  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1273  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1274  *      if the driver fills this value it should add
1275  *      %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1276  *      to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1277  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1278  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1279  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1280  */
1281 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1282         RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE            = BIT(0),
1283         RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI            = BIT(2),
1284         RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF               = BIT(3),
1285         RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK           = BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1286         RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC                = BIT(6),
1287         RX_ENC_FLAG_BF                  = BIT(7),
1288 };
1289 
1290 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT          4
1291 
1292 enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1293         RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1294         RX_ENC_HT,
1295         RX_ENC_VHT,
1296         RX_ENC_HE,
1297 };
1298 
1299 /**
1300  * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1301  *
1302  * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1303  * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1304  * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1305  *
1306  * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1307  *      (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1308  * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1309  *      needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1310  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1311  *      it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1312  * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1313  * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1314  *      This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1315  *      for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1316  * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1317  *      unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1318  *      @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1319  * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1320  *      values were filled.
1321  * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1322  *      support dB or unspecified units)
1323  * @antenna: antenna used
1324  * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1325  *      HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1326  * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1327  * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1328  * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1329  * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1330  * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1331  * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1332  * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1333  * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1334  * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1335  * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1336  *      each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1337  * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1338  * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1339  */
1340 struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1341         u64 mactime;
1342         u64 boottime_ns;
1343         u32 device_timestamp;
1344         u32 ampdu_reference;
1345         u32 flag;
1346         u16 freq;
1347         u8 enc_flags;
1348         u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1349         u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1350         u8 rate_idx;
1351         u8 nss;
1352         u8 rx_flags;
1353         u8 band;
1354         u8 antenna;
1355         s8 signal;
1356         u8 chains;
1357         s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1358         u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1359         u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1360 };
1361 
1362 /**
1363  * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1364  * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1365  *      (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1366  *       bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1367  * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1368  *      alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1369  *      description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1370  *      Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1371  * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1372  * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1373  * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1374  *      then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1375  *      @data field.
1376  * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1377  *      the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1378  *      length
1379  * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1380  *
1381  * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1382  * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1383  * data.
1384  */
1385 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1386         u32 present;
1387         u8 align;
1388         u8 oui[3];
1389         u8 subns;
1390         u8 pad;
1391         u16 len;
1392         u8 data[];
1393 } __packed;
1394 
1395 /**
1396  * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1397  *
1398  * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1399  *
1400  * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1401  *      to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1402  *      or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1403  * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1404  *      This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1405  *      meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1406  *      transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1407  *      Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1408  *      driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1409  *      for more.
1410  * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1411  *      the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1412  *      may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1413  *      be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1414  *      it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1415  * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1416  *      operating channel.
1417  */
1418 enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1419         IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR          = (1<<0),
1420         IEEE80211_CONF_PS               = (1<<1),
1421         IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE             = (1<<2),
1422         IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL       = (1<<3),
1423 };
1424 
1425 
1426 /**
1427  * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1428  *
1429  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1430  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1431  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1432  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1433  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1434  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1435  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1436  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1437  *      Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1438  *      otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1439  */
1440 enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1441         IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS              = BIT(1),
1442         IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL   = BIT(2),
1443         IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR           = BIT(3),
1444         IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS                = BIT(4),
1445         IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER             = BIT(5),
1446         IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL           = BIT(6),
1447         IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS      = BIT(7),
1448         IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE              = BIT(8),
1449 };
1450 
1451 /**
1452  * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1453  *
1454  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1455  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1456  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1457  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1458  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1459  */
1460 enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1461         IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1462         IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1463         IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1464         IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1465 
1466         /* keep last */
1467         IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1468 };
1469 
1470 /**
1471  * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1472  *
1473  * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1474  *
1475  * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1476  *
1477  * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1478  * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1479  *      in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1480  *      has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1481  * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1482  *      powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1483  *      the CONF_PS flag is set.
1484  *
1485  * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1486  *      value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1487  *
1488  * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1489  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1490  *
1491  * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1492  *      (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1493  *      but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1494  * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1495  *      frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1496  *      number of transmissions not the number of retries
1497  *
1498  * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1499  *      %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1500  *      configured for an HT channel.
1501  *      Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1502  *      otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1503  */
1504 struct ieee80211_conf {
1505         u32 flags;
1506         int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1507 
1508         u16 listen_interval;
1509         u8 ps_dtim_period;
1510 
1511         u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1512 
1513         struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1514         bool radar_enabled;
1515         enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1516 };
1517 
1518 /**
1519  * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1520  *
1521  * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1522  * operation.
1523  *
1524  * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1525  *      Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1526  *      announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1527  *      the driver passed into mac80211.
1528  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1529  *      rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1530  * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1531  *      scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1532  * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1533  * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1534  * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1535   *     current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1536   *     channel, expressed in TU.
1537  */
1538 struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1539         u64 timestamp;
1540         u32 device_timestamp;
1541         bool block_tx;
1542         struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1543         u8 count;
1544         u32 delay;
1545 };
1546 
1547 /**
1548  * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1549  *
1550  * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1551  *      on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1552  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1553  *      monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1554  *      connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1555  *      provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1556  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1557  *      interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1558  *      but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1559  *      only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1560  * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1561  *      and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1562  *      this is not pure P2P vif.
1563  */
1564 enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1565         IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER             = BIT(0),
1566         IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI         = BIT(1),
1567         IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD            = BIT(2),
1568         IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE            = BIT(3),
1569 };
1570 
1571 /**
1572  * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1573  *
1574  * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1575  * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1576  *
1577  * @type: type of this virtual interface
1578  * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1579  *      or the BSS we're associated to
1580  * @addr: address of this interface
1581  * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1582  *      interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1583  * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1584  *      write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1585  *      for read access.
1586  * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
1587  * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1588  *      these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1589  *      or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1590  *      at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1591  * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1592  * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1593  * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1594  *      when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1595  *      path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1596  *      be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1597  *      processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1598  * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1599  *      interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1600  *      monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1601  * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1602  *      interface.
1603  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1604  *      sizeof(void \*).
1605  * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1606  * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1607  *      protected by fq->lock.
1608  */
1609 struct ieee80211_vif {
1610         enum nl80211_iftype type;
1611         struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1612         u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1613         bool p2p;
1614         bool csa_active;
1615         bool mu_mimo_owner;
1616 
1617         u8 cab_queue;
1618         u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1619 
1620         struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1621 
1622         struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1623 
1624         u32 driver_flags;
1625 
1626 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1627         struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1628 #endif
1629 
1630         unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1631 
1632         bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1633 
1634         /* must be last */
1635         u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1636 };
1637 
1638 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1639 {
1640 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1641         return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1642 #endif
1643         return false;
1644 }
1645 
1646 /**
1647  * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1648  * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1649  *
1650  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1651  * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1652  *
1653  * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1654  * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1655  * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1656  */
1657 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1658 
1659 /**
1660  * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1661  * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1662  *
1663  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1664  * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1665  *
1666  * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1667  * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1668  * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1669  */
1670 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1671 
1672 /**
1673  * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1674  *
1675  * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1676  * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1677  *
1678  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1679  *      driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1680  *      particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1681  *      will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1682  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1683  *      the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1684  *      generation in software.
1685  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1686  *      that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1687  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1688  *      CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1689  *      (MFP) to be done in software.
1690  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1691  *      if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1692  *      itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1693  *      @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1694  *      not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1695  *      MIC.
1696  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1697  *      management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1698  *      crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1699  *      properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1700  *      fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1701  *      RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1702  *      %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1703  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1704  *      driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1705  *      only for managment frames (MFP).
1706  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1707  *      driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1708  *      be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1709  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1710  *      a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1711  *      @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1712  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1713  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
1714  *      for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
1715  *      generation only
1716  */
1717 enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1718         IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT     = BIT(0),
1719         IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV          = BIT(1),
1720         IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC        = BIT(2),
1721         IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE             = BIT(3),
1722         IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX           = BIT(4),
1723         IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE         = BIT(5),
1724         IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT              = BIT(6),
1725         IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM     = BIT(7),
1726         IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE        = BIT(8),
1727         IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX           = BIT(9),
1728         IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE        = BIT(10),
1729 };
1730 
1731 /**
1732  * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1733  *
1734  * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1735  * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1736  *
1737  * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1738  *      wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1739  *      encrypted in hardware.
1740  * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1741  * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1742  *      needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1743  * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1744  * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1745  * @keylen: key material length
1746  * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1747  *      data block:
1748  *      - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1749  *      - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1750  *      - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1751  * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1752  * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1753  */
1754 struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1755         atomic64_t tx_pn;
1756         u32 cipher;
1757         u8 icv_len;
1758         u8 iv_len;
1759         u8 hw_key_idx;
1760         s8 keyidx;
1761         u16 flags;
1762         u8 keylen;
1763         u8 key[0];
1764 };
1765 
1766 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN    16
1767 
1768 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1769 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1770 
1771 /**
1772  * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1773  *
1774  * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1775  * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1776  *      reverse order than in packet)
1777  * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1778  *      reverse order than in packet)
1779  * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1780  *      reverse order than in packet)
1781  * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1782  *      reverse order than in packet)
1783  * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
1784  */
1785 struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1786         union {
1787                 struct {
1788                         u32 iv32;
1789                         u16 iv16;
1790                 } tkip;
1791                 struct {
1792                         u8 pn[6];
1793                 } ccmp;
1794                 struct {
1795                         u8 pn[6];
1796                 } aes_cmac;
1797                 struct {
1798                         u8 pn[6];
1799                 } aes_gmac;
1800                 struct {
1801                         u8 pn[6];
1802                 } gcmp;
1803                 struct {
1804                         u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1805                         u8 seq_len;
1806                 } hw;
1807         };
1808 };
1809 
1810 /**
1811  * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1812  *
1813  * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1814  * the secure packet crypto handling.
1815  *
1816  * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1817  * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1818  * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1819  * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1820  * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1821  * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1822  * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1823  * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1824  *     key_idx value calculation:
1825  *      (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1826  * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1827  */
1828 struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1829         u32 cipher;
1830         u16 iftype;
1831         u8 hdr_len;
1832         u8 pn_len;
1833         u8 pn_off;
1834         u8 key_idx_off;
1835         u8 key_idx_mask;
1836         u8 key_idx_shift;
1837         u8 mic_len;
1838 };
1839 
1840 /**
1841  * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1842  *
1843  * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1844  * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1845  *
1846  * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1847  * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1848  */
1849 enum set_key_cmd {
1850         SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
1851 };
1852 
1853 /**
1854  * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1855  *
1856  * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1857  *      this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1858  * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1859  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1860  * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1861  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1862  */
1863 enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1864         /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1865         IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1866         IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1867         IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1868         IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1869         IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1870 };
1871 
1872 /**
1873  * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1874  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1875  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1876  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1877  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1878  *      (including 80+80 MHz)
1879  *
1880  * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1881  *      correctly, the values must be sorted.
1882  */
1883 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1884         IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1885         IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1886         IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1887         IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1888 };
1889 
1890 /**
1891  * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1892  *
1893  * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
1894  * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
1895  *      Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1896  */
1897 struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1898         struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1899         struct {
1900                 s8 idx;
1901                 u8 count;
1902                 u8 count_cts;
1903                 u8 count_rts;
1904                 u16 flags;
1905         } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1906 };
1907 
1908 /**
1909  * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
1910  *
1911  * Used to configure txpower for station.
1912  *
1913  * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
1914  *      to the STA.
1915  * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
1916  *      will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
1917  *      %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
1918  *      NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
1919  *      per peer TPC.
1920  */
1921 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
1922         s16 power;
1923         enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
1924 };
1925 
1926 /**
1927  * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1928  *
1929  * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1930  * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1931  * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1932  * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1933  * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
1934  * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
1935  *
1936  * @addr: MAC address
1937  * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
1938  * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
1939  * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1940  * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1941  * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
1942  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1943  *      that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1944  *      Can be modified by driver.
1945  * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1946  *      otherwise always false)
1947  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1948  *      sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
1949  * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1950  *      if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
1951  *      IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
1952  * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
1953  * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
1954  * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1955  *      station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1956  *      notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1957  *      the station moves to associated state.
1958  * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
1959  * @rates: rate control selection table
1960  * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
1961  * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1962  *      valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
1963  * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
1964  * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1965  *      A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1966  *      unlimited.
1967  * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
1968  * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
1969  * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
1970  * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
1971  *      the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
1972  */
1973 struct ieee80211_sta {
1974         u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1975         u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1976         u16 aid;
1977         struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
1978         struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
1979         struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
1980         u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
1981         bool wme;
1982         u8 uapsd_queues;
1983         u8 max_sp;
1984         u8 rx_nss;
1985         enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
1986         enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1987         struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
1988         bool tdls;
1989         bool tdls_initiator;
1990         bool mfp;
1991         u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
1992 
1993         /**
1994          * @max_amsdu_len:
1995          * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
1996          * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
1997          * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
1998          *
1999          * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
2000          *   A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2001          * * If the skb is not part of a BA aggreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2002          *   size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
2003          *
2004          * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
2005          * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
2006          * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
2007          */
2008         u16 max_amsdu_len;
2009         bool support_p2p_ps;
2010         u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2011         u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2012         struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2013 
2014         struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2015 
2016         /* must be last */
2017         u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2018 };
2019 
2020 /**
2021  * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2022  *
2023  * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2024  * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2025  *
2026  * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2027  * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2028  */
2029 enum sta_notify_cmd {
2030         STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2031 };
2032 
2033 /**
2034  * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2035  *
2036  * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2037  *      it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2038  */
2039 struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2040         struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2041 };
2042 
2043 /**
2044  * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2045  *
2046  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2047  * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2048  * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2049  *      %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2050  * @ac: the AC for this queue
2051  * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2052  *
2053  * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2054  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2055  */
2056 struct ieee80211_txq {
2057         struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2058         struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2059         u8 tid;
2060         u8 ac;
2061 
2062         /* must be last */
2063         u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2064 };
2065 
2066 /**
2067  * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2068  *
2069  * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2070  * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2071  * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2072  * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2073  * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2074  *
2075  * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2076  *      The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2077  *      controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2078  *      should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2079  *      will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2080  *      algorithm.
2081  *      Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2082  *      callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2083  *      the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2084  *      @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2085  *      timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2086  *      CCK frames.
2087  *
2088  * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2089  *      Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2090  *      the FCS at the end.
2091  *
2092  * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2093  *      Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2094  *      for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2095  *      rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2096  *      to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2097  *      multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2098  *      the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2099  *
2100  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2101  *      Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2102  *      expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2103  *      If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2104  *
2105  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2106  *      Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2107  *      one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2108  *      between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2109  *
2110  * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2111  *      Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2112  *      Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2113  *
2114  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2115  *      Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2116  *
2117  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2118  *      Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2119  *
2120  * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2121  *      Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2122  *      stack support for dynamic PS.
2123  *
2124  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2125  *      Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2126  *
2127  * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2128  *      Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2129  *
2130  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2131  *      Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2132  *      the stack.
2133  *
2134  * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2135  *      The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2136  *      periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2137  *
2138  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2139  *      This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2140  *      dtim_period).
2141  *
2142  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2143  *      per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2144  *      the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2145  *      to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2146  *      possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2147  *      only in that case.
2148  *
2149  * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2150  *      autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2151  *      this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2152  *      stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2153  *      Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2154  *      the PS mode of connected stations.
2155  *
2156  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2157  *      setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2158  *      software.
2159  *
2160  * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2161  *      a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2162  *      active interfaces.
2163  *
2164  * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2165  *      be created.  It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2166  *      desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2167  *
2168  * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2169  *      crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2170  *      try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2171  *      the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2172  *      supported cipher suites.
2173  *
2174  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2175  *      this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2176  *      for frames.
2177  *
2178  * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2179  *      queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2180  *      for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2181  *      control for more details.
2182  *
2183  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2184  *      selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2185  *
2186  * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2187  *      P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2188  *      is supported.
2189  *
2190  * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2191  *      only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2192  *
2193  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2194  *      and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2195  *      using aggregation for such frames.)
2196  *
2197  * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2198  *      for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2199  *      is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2200  *      CSA frame.
2201  *
2202  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2203  *      or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2204  *
2205  * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2206  *      in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2207  *
2208  * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2209  *      than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2210  *
2211  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2212  *      within A-MPDU.
2213  *
2214  * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2215  *      for sent beacons.
2216  *
2217  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2218  *      station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2219  *      by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2220  *      from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2221  *
2222  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2223  *      reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2224  *      order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2225  *      timeout.
2226  *
2227  * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2228  *      which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2229  *
2230  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2231  *      A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2232  *      When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2233  *      limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2234  *      max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2235  *
2236  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2237  *      skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2238  *
2239  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2240  *      by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2241  *      drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2242  *      is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2243  *
2244  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2245  *      The stack will not do fragmentation.
2246  *      The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2247  *
2248  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2249  *      TDLS links.
2250  *
2251  * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2252  *      mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2253  *      deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2254  *      beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2255  *      virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2256  *      the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2257  *      deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2258  *
2259  * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2260  *      support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2261  *
2262  * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2263  *      course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2264  *
2265  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2266  *      extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2267  *      the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2268  *      but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2269  *      See also the documentation for that flag.
2270  *
2271  * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2272  *      MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2273  *      TXQs to start with.
2274  *
2275  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2276  *      length in tx status information
2277  *
2278  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2279  *
2280  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2281  *      only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2282  *
2283  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
2284  *      aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
2285  *      A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
2286  *
2287  * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2288  */
2289 enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2290         IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2291         IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2292         IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2293         IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2294         IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2295         IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2296         IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2297         IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2298         IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2299         IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2300         IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2301         IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2302         IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2303         IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2304         IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2305         IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2306         IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2307         IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2308         IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2309         IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2310         IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2311         IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2312         IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2313         IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2314         IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2315         IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2316         IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2317         IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2318         IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2319         IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2320         IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2321         IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2322         IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2323         IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2324         IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2325         IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2326         IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2327         IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2328         IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2329         IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2330         IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2331         IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2332         IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2333         IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2334         IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2335         IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2336         IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2337         IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2338         IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2339 
2340         /* keep last, obviously */
2341         NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2342 };
2343 
2344 /**
2345  * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2346  *
2347  * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2348  * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2349  *
2350  * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2351  *      802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2352  *      members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2353  *      and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2354  *      bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2355  *
2356  * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2357  *
2358  * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2359  *      along with this structure.
2360  *
2361  * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2362  *
2363  * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2364  *      for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2365  *
2366  * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2367  *      Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2368  *
2369  * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2370  *      only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2371  *
2372  * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2373  *      that HW supports
2374  *
2375  * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2376  *      data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2377  *      queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2378  *
2379  * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2380  *      If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2381  *      set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2382  *
2383  * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2384  *      within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2385  * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2386  *      within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2387  * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2388  *      within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2389  * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2390  *      within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2391  *
2392  * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2393  *      can handle.
2394  * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2395  *      the hw can report back.
2396  * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2397  *
2398  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2399  *      sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2400  *      aggregation.
2401  *      This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2402  *      number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2403  *      it shouldn't be set.
2404  *
2405  * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2406  *      aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2407  *      advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2408  *      the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2409  *      with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2410  *      For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2411  *
2412  * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2413  *      of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2414  *
2415  * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2416  *      (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2417  *
2418  * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2419  *      reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2420  *      include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2421  *      adding _BW is supported today.
2422  *
2423  * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2424  *      the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2425  *      Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2426  *
2427  * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2428  *
2429  * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2430  *      @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2431  *      field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2432  *      device_timestamp.
2433  * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2434  *      IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2435  *      IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2436  * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2437  *      radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2438  *
2439  * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2440  *      from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2441  *      other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2442  *
2443  * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2444  *      for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2445  *      enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2446  *      Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2447  *      that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2448  *      neither enabled.
2449  *
2450  * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2451  *      deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2452  *      Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2453  *
2454  * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2455  * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2456  *      supported by HW.
2457  * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2458  *      device.
2459  *
2460  * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2461  *      them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2462  *      unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2463  *
2464  * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2465  *      refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2466  *
2467  * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
2468  */
2469 struct ieee80211_hw {
2470         struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2471         struct wiphy *wiphy;
2472         const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2473         void *priv;
2474         unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2475         unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2476         unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2477         int vif_data_size;
2478         int sta_data_size;
2479         int chanctx_data_size;
2480         int txq_data_size;
2481         u16 queues;
2482         u16 max_listen_interval;
2483         s8 max_signal;
2484         u8 max_rates;
2485         u8 max_report_rates;
2486         u8 max_rate_tries;
2487         u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2488         u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2489         u8 max_tx_fragments;
2490         u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2491         u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2492         u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2493         struct {
2494                 int units_pos;
2495                 s16 accuracy;
2496         } radiotap_timestamp;
2497         netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2498         u8 uapsd_queues;
2499         u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2500         u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2501         const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
2502         u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2503         u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2504         u8 weight_multiplier;
2505         u32 max_mtu;
2506 };
2507 
2508 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2509                                        enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2510 {
2511         return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2512 }
2513 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg)     _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2514 
2515 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2516                                      enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2517 {
2518         return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2519 }
2520 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg)       _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2521 
2522 /**
2523  * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2524  *
2525  * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2526  * @req: cfg80211 request.
2527  */
2528 struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2529         struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2530 
2531         /* Keep last */
2532         struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2533 };
2534 
2535 /**
2536  * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2537  *
2538  * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2539  * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2540  * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2541  * @status: channel-switch response status
2542  * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2543  * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2544  * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2545  * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2546  * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2547  */
2548 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2549         struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2550         struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2551         u8 action_code;
2552         u32 status;
2553         u32 timestamp;
2554         u16 switch_time;
2555         u16 switch_timeout;
2556         struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2557         u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2558 };
2559 
2560 /**
2561  * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2562  *
2563  * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2564  *
2565  * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2566  * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2567  * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2568  * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2569  * is already used internally by mac80211.
2570  *
2571  * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2572  */
2573 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2574 
2575 /**
2576  * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2577  *
2578  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2579  * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2580  */
2581 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2582 {
2583         set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2584 }
2585 
2586 /**
2587  * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2588  *
2589  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2590  * @addr: the address to set
2591  */
2592 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2593 {
2594         memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2595 }
2596 
2597 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2598 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2599                       const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2600 {
2601         if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2602                 return NULL;
2603         return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2604 }
2605 
2606 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2607 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2608                            const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2609 {
2610         if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2611                 return NULL;
2612         return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2613 }
2614 
2615 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2616 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2617                              const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2618 {
2619         if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2620                 return NULL;
2621         return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2622 }
2623 
2624 /**
2625  * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2626  * @hw: the hardware
2627  * @skb: the skb
2628  *
2629  * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2630  * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2631  */
2632 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2633 
2634 /**
2635  * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2636  *
2637  * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2638  * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2639  *
2640  * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2641  * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2642  * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2643  * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2644  * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2645  * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2646  * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2647  *
2648  * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2649  * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2650  * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2651  *
2652  * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2653  * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2654  * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2655  * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2656  *
2657  * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2658  * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2659  * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2660  * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2661  *
2662  * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2663  *
2664  * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2665  * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2666  * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2667  * based on the receive flags.
2668  *
2669  * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2670  * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2671  * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2672  * keys.
2673  *
2674  * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2675  * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2676  * handler.
2677  * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2678  * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2679  * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2680  * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
2681  * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
2682  * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
2683  *
2684  * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2685  * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2686  * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
2687  *
2688  * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
2689  * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to to following
2690  * requirements:
2691  * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to
2692       mac80211 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been
2693       completed when also setting @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV for any key,
2694    2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
2695       at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
2696    3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
2697       encrypted with the new key and
2698    4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
2699    Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
2700  */
2701 
2702 /**
2703  * DOC: Powersave support
2704  *
2705  * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2706  *
2707  * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2708  * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2709  * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2710  * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2711  * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2712  * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2713  * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2714  * it finds traffic directed to it.
2715  *
2716  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2717  * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2718  * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
2719  * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2720  * back to sleep at appropriate times.
2721  *
2722  * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2723  * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2724  * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
2725  *
2726  * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2727  * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2728  * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2729  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
2730  * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2731  * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
2732  * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
2733  *
2734  * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2735  * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2736  * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2737  * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2738  * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2739  * periods.
2740  *
2741  * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
2742  * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2743  * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2744  * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2745  * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2746  * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2747  * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2748  * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2749  * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2750  * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2751  *
2752  * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2753  * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
2754  * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
2755  * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2756  * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2757  * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2758  *
2759  * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2760  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
2761  */
2762 
2763 /**
2764  * DOC: Beacon filter support
2765  *
2766  * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
2767  * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
2768  * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2769  * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2770  * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2771  * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2772  * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2773  *
2774  * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2775  * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
2776  * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2777  * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2778  * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2779  *
2780  * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2781  * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2782  * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2783  * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2784  *
2785  * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2786  * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2787  * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2788  * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2789  *
2790  *  - a list of information element IDs
2791  *  - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2792  *
2793  * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2794  * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2795  * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2796  * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2797  * vendor information elements.
2798  *
2799  * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2800  * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2801  *
2802  * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2803  * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2804  * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2805  * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2806  * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2807  * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2808  *
2809  *
2810  * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2811  * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2812  * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2813  * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2814  * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2815  * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2816  * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2817  * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2818  *
2819  * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2820  * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2821  * signal strength threshold checking.
2822  */
2823 
2824 /**
2825  * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2826  *
2827  * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2828  * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2829  * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2830  * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2831  *
2832  * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2833  * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2834  * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2835  * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2836  * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2837  * hardware flags.
2838  *
2839  * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2840  * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2841  * turned off otherwise.
2842  *
2843  * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2844  * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2845  * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2846  * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2847  */
2848 
2849 /**
2850  * DOC: Frame filtering
2851  *
2852  * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2853  * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2854  * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2855  * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2856  * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2857  *
2858  * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2859  * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2860  * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2861  *
2862  * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2863  * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2864  * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2865  * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2866  * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2867  * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2868  * @total_flags with the new flag states.
2869  *
2870  * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2871  * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2872  * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2873  * or dropped.
2874  *
2875  * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2876  * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2877  * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2878  * the flag, but not clear it.
2879  * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2880  * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2881  * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2882  * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2883  * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2884  * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2885  * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2886  * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
2887  */
2888 
2889 /**
2890  * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2891  *
2892  * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2893  * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2894  * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2895  *
2896  * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2897  * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2898  * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2899  * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2900  * the driver code.
2901  *
2902  * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2903  * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2904  * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2905  * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2906  * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2907  * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2908  * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2909  *
2910  * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2911  * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2912  * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2913  * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2914  * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2915  * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2916  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2917  * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2918  * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2919  * @sta_notify callback.
2920  *
2921  * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2922  * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2923  * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2924  * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2925  * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2926  * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2927  * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
2928  * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
2929  * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2930  * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2931  * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2932  * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2933  * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2934  * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2935  *
2936  * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2937  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2938  *
2939  * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2940  * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2941  * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2942  * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2943  * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2944  * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2945  * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2946  * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2947  * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2948  * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2949  * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2950  *
2951  * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2952  * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2953  * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2954  * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2955  * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2956  * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2957  * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2958  * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2959  * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2960  * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
2961  * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
2962  * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2963  * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2964  * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2965  *
2966  * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2967  * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2968  * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2969  * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2970  * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
2971  * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
2972  * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2973  *
2974  * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2975  * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2976  * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2977  * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
2978  * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
2979  *
2980  * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2981  * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2982  * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2983  * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
2984  */
2985 
2986 /**
2987  * DOC: HW queue control
2988  *
2989  * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2990  * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2991  * was problematic for a few reasons:
2992  * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2993  * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2994  * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2995  *
2996  * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2997  * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2998  * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2999  *
3000  * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
3001  * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
3002  * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
3003  * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
3004  * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
3005  * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
3006  * the hardware queue.
3007  * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
3008  * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3009  *
3010  * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
3011  * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3012  * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3013  * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3014  * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3015  *
3016  * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3017  * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3018  * after-DTIM queue for AP:   8
3019  * off-channel queue:         9
3020  *
3021  * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3022  *   hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3023  *
3024  * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3025  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3026  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3027  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3028  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3029  *   vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3030  * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3031  *
3032  * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3033  * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3034  *
3035  * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3036  * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3037  * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3038  * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3039  */
3040 
3041 /**
3042  * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3043  *
3044  * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3045  * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3046  * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3047  * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3048  *
3049  * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3050  *      by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3051  *      multicast address.
3052  *
3053  * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3054  *      %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3055  *
3056  * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3057  *      the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3058  *
3059  * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3060  *      to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3061  *      by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3062  *      mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3063  *      honour this flag if possible.
3064  *
3065  * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3066  *      station
3067  *
3068  * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3069  *
3070  * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3071  *
3072  * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3073  */
3074 enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3075         FIF_ALLMULTI            = 1<<1,
3076         FIF_FCSFAIL             = 1<<2,
3077         FIF_PLCPFAIL            = 1<<3,
3078         FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
3079         FIF_CONTROL             = 1<<5,
3080         FIF_OTHER_BSS           = 1<<6,
3081         FIF_PSPOLL              = 1<<7,
3082         FIF_PROBE_REQ           = 1<<8,
3083 };
3084 
3085 /**
3086  * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3087  *
3088  * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3089  * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3090  *
3091  * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3092  * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3093  * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3094  * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3095  *
3096  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3097  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3098  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
3099  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3100  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3101  *      queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3102  *      driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3103  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3104  *      called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3105  *      ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3106  *      session is gone and removes the station.
3107  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3108  *      but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3109  *      now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3110  *      should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3111  */
3112 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3113         IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3114         IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3115         IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3116         IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3117         IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3118         IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3119         IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3120 };
3121 
3122 /**
3123  * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3124  *
3125  * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3126  * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3127  * @tid: tid of the BA session
3128  * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3129  *      action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3130  *      actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3131  * @buf_size: reorder buffer size  (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3132  *      action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3133  *      %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3134  * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3135  *      valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3136  * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3137  *      %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3138  */
3139 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3140         enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3141         struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3142         u16 tid;
3143         u16 ssn;
3144         u16 buf_size;
3145         bool amsdu;
3146         u16 timeout;
3147 };
3148 
3149 /**
3150  * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3151  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3152  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3153  *      frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3154  */
3155 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3156         IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3157         IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3158 };
3159 
3160 /**
3161  * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3162  *
3163  * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3164  *      to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3165  *      information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3166  *      flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3167  * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3168  * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3169  *      changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3170  *      the peer.
3171  * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3172  *      by the peer
3173  */
3174 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3175         IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED         = BIT(0),
3176         IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED       = BIT(1),
3177         IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
3178         IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED        = BIT(3),
3179 };
3180 
3181 /**
3182  * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3183  *
3184  * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3185  * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3186  * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
3187  * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3188  * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3189  *
3190  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3191  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3192  *      for sending managment frames offchannel.
3193  */
3194 enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3195         IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3196         IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3197 };
3198 
3199 /**
3200  * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
3201  *
3202  * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3203  * reconfiguration type was completed.
3204  *
3205  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3206  *      (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3207  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3208  *      of wowlan configuration)
3209  */
3210 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3211         IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3212         IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3213 };
3214 
3215 /**
3216  * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3217  *
3218  * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3219  * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3220  * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3221  *
3222  * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3223  *      skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3224  *      The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3225  *      configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3226  *      preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3227  *      Must be atomic.
3228  *
3229  * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3230  *      is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3231  *      frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3232  *      Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3233  *      or zero.
3234  *      When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3235  *      to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3236  *      is added.
3237  *      Must be implemented and can sleep.
3238  *
3239  * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3240  *      is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3241  *      it must turn off frame reception.)
3242  *      May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3243  *      an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3244  *      you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3245  *      Must be implemented and can sleep.
3246  *
3247  * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3248  *      stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3249  *      ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3250  *      configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3251  *      reconfigured at resume time.
3252  *      The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3253  *      wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3254  *      supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3255  *      must return 1 from this function.
3256  *
3257  * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3258  *      now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3259  *      functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3260  *      to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3261  *      will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3262  *
3263  * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3264  *      modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3265  *      supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3266  *      in suspend().
3267  *
3268  * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3269  *      enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3270  *      and @stop must be implemented.
3271  *      The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3272  *      the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3273  *      interface is given in the conf parameter.
3274  *      The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3275  *      negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3276  *      Must be implemented and can sleep.
3277  *
3278  * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3279  *      is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3280  *      switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3281  *      Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3282  *      found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3283  *
3284  * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3285  *      The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3286  *      and no monitor interfaces are present.
3287  *      When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3288  *      must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3289  *      the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3290  *      MAC address of the device going away.
3291  *      Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3292  *
3293  * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3294  *      function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3295  *      This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3296  *      if it does. The callback can sleep.
3297  *
3298  * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3299  *      parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3300  *      level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3301  *      This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3302  *      for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3303  *      of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3304  *      can sleep.
3305  *
3306  * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3307  *      This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3308  *      to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3309  *
3310  * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3311  *      See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3312  *      This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3313  *
3314  * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3315  *      This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3316  *      should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3317  *      of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3318  *      which flags are changed.
3319  *      This callback can sleep.
3320  *
3321  * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3322  *      must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3323  *
3324  * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3325  *      This callback is only called between add_interface and
3326  *      remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3327  *      is enabled.
3328  *      Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3329  *      The callback can sleep.
3330  *
3331  * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3332  *      This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3333  *      which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3334  *      The callback must be atomic.
3335  *
3336  * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3337  *      host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3338  *      necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3339  *      After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3340  *      userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3341  *
3342  * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3343  *      WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3344  *      offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3345  *
3346  * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3347  *      the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3348  *      configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3349  *      registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3350  *      that power save is disabled.
3351  *      The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3352  *      entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3353  *      at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3354  *      (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3355  *      When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3356  *      note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3357  *      any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3358  *      This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3359  *      this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3360  *      software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3361  *      capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3362  *      advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3363  *      The callback can sleep.
3364  *
3365  * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3366  *      The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3367  *      but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3368  *      ieee80211_scan_completed().
3369  *      This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3370  *      scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3371  *      The callback can sleep.
3372  *
3373  * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3374  *      specific intervals.  The driver must call the
3375  *      ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3376  *      This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3377  *
3378  * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3379  *      In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3380  *
3381  * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3382  *      is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3383  *      The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3384  *      the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3385  *      can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3386  *
3387  * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3388  *      software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3389  *      this notification.
3390  *      The callback can sleep.
3391  *
3392  * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3393  *      Returns zero if statistics are available.
3394  *      The callback can sleep.
3395  *
3396  * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3397  *      IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3398  *      IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3399  *      The callback must be atomic.
3400  *
3401  * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3402  *      if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3403  *      stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3404  *      should be set as well.
3405  *      The callback can sleep.
3406  *
3407  * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3408  *      The callback can sleep.
3409  *
3410  * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3411  *      AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3412  *
3413  * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3414  *      station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3415  *      returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3416  *      no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3417  *      the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3418  *      This callback can sleep.
3419  *
3420  * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3421  *      when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3422  *      should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3423  *      callback can sleep.
3424  *
3425  * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3426  *      associated station, AP,  IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3427  *      in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3428  *      %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3429  *
3430  * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3431  *      station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3432  *      This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3433  *      It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3434  *      up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3435  *      isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3436  *      period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3437  *      See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3438  *      The callback can sleep.
3439  *
3440  * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3441  *      synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3442  *      pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3443  *      the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3444  *      in @sta_state.
3445  *      The callback can sleep.
3446  *
3447  * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3448  *      used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3449  *      from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3450  *      in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3451  *      uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3452  *      otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3453  *      Must be atomic.
3454  * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3455  *      is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3456  *      the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3457  *
3458  * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3459  *      filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3460  *      let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3461  *      the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3462  *      all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3463  *      Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3464  *      The callback can sleep.
3465  *
3466  * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3467  *      bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3468  *      Returns a negative error code on failure.
3469  *      The callback can sleep.
3470  *
3471  * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3472  *      this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3473  *      required function.
3474  *      The callback can sleep.
3475  *
3476  * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3477  *      Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3478  *      required function.
3479  *      The callback can sleep.
3480  *
3481  * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3482  *      firmware/hardware.  Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3483  *      calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3484  *      as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3485  *      The callback can sleep.
3486  *
3487  * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3488  *      with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3489  *      function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3490  *      TSF synchronization.
3491  *      The callback can sleep.
3492  *
3493  * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3494  *      This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3495  *      used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3496  *      Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3497  *      The callback can sleep.
3498  *
3499  * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3500  *
3501  * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3502  *      need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3503  *      and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3504  *      The callback can sleep.
3505  *
3506  * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3507  *      in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3508  *      accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3509  *      estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3510  *      coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3511  *
3512  * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3513  *      be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3514  * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3515  *
3516  * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3517  *      that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3518  *      of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3519  *      use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3520  *      If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3521  *      Note that vif can be NULL.
3522  *      The callback can sleep.
3523  *
3524  * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3525  *      switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3526  *      callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3527  *      completion of the channel switch.
3528  *
3529  * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3530  *      Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3531  *      reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3532  *      (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3533  *
3534  * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3535  *
3536  * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3537  *      call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3538  *      that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3539  *      offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3540  *      normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3541  *      duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3542  *      ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3543  *      Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3544  *      must be accepted in this case.
3545  *      This callback may sleep.
3546  * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3547  *      aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3548  *
3549  * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3550  *
3551  * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3552  *
3553  * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3554  *      queues before entering power save.
3555  *
3556  * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3557  *      when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3558  *      The callback can sleep.
3559  * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3560  *      &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3561  *      The callback must be atomic.
3562  *
3563  * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3564  *      parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3565  *      sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3566  *      to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3567  *      Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3568  *      if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3569  *      the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3570  *      the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3571  *      more-data bit must always be set.
3572  *      The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3573  *      from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3574  *      In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3575  *      @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3576  *      this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3577  *      on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3578  *      period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3579  *      responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3580  *      In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3581  *      bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3582  *      at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3583  *      setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3584  *      service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3585  *      on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3586  *      ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3587  *      This callback must be atomic.
3588  * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3589  *      to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3590  *      via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3591  *      released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3592  *      and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3593  *      frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3594  *      them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3595  *      on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3596  *      bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3597  *      ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3598  *      The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3599  *      frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3600  *      This callback must be atomic.
3601  *
3602  * @get_et_sset_count:  Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3603  *
3604  * @get_et_stats:  Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3605  *
3606  * @get_et_strings:  Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3607  *      and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3608  *
3609  * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3610  *      before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3611  *      bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3612  *      yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3613  *      transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3614  *      powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3615  *      management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3616  *      driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3617  *      and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3618  *      For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3619  *      would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3620  *      frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3621  *      The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3622  *      mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3623  *      If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the
3624  *      duration for which the operation is requested.
3625  *      The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3626  *
3627  * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3628  *      a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3629  *      channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3630  *      setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3631  *      mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3632  *      discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3633  *      2 * (DTIM period).
3634  *      The callback is optional and can sleep.
3635  *
3636  * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3637  *      This callback may sleep.
3638  * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3639  *      This callback may sleep.
3640  * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3641  *      may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3642  *      channel context with different settings
3643  *      This callback may sleep.
3644  * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3645  *      to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3646  *      This callback may sleep.
3647  * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3648  *      unbound from vif.
3649  *      This callback may sleep.
3650  * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3651  *      another, as specified in the list of
3652  *      @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3653  *      to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3654  *      This callback may sleep.
3655  *
3656  * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3657  *      information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3658  *      context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3659  *      software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3660  *      just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3661  *      disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3662  * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
3663  *
3664  * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3665  *      during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3666  *      This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3667  *      indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3668  *      This callback may sleep.
3669  *
3670  * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3671  *      Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3672  *      This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
3673  *
3674  * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3675  *      Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3676  *      function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
3677  *      decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
3678  *      ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3679  *      get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
3680  *      1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
3681  *      transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
3682  *      If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3683  *      since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
3684  * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3685  *      before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3686  *      gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3687  *      the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
3688  * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3689  *      after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3690  *      driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3691  * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3692  *      when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
3693  *      driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3694  * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
3695  *      when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
3696  *      CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
3697  * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3698  *      information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3699  *      channel context is bound before this is called.
3700  * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
3701  *
3702  * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3703  *      specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3704  *      if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
3705  *
3706  * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3707  *      and hardware limits.
3708  *
3709  * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3710  *      is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3711  *      and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3712  *      driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3713  *      the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3714  *      The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3715  *      optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3716  * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3717  *      peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
3718  * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3719  *      response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3720  *      parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3721  *      an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3722  *      response template is provided, together with the location of the
3723  *      switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3724  *      the function call.
3725  *
3726  * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
3727  * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3728  *      synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3729  *      pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3730  *      currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
3731  *
3732  * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3733  * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
3734  * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3735  *      contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3736  *      are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3737  *      The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3738  *      some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3739  *      changed parameters.
3740  * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3741  *      cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3742  *      this call.
3743  * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3744  *      ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3745  *      NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
3746  * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
3747  *      aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
3748  *      between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
3749  *      skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
3750  * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
3751  *      Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
3752  *
3753  * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
3754  * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
3755  */
3756 struct ieee80211_ops {
3757         void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3758                    struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3759                    struct sk_buff *skb);
3760         int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3761         void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3762 #ifdef CONFIG_PM
3763         int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3764         int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3765         void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
3766 #endif
3767         int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3768                              struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3769         int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3770                                 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3771                                 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
3772         void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3773                                  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3774         int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
3775         void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3776                                  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3777                                  struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3778                                  u32 changed);
3779 
3780         int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3781         void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3782 
3783         u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3784                                  struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
3785         void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3786                                  unsigned int changed_flags,
3787                                  unsigned int *total_flags,
3788                                  u64 multicast);
3789         void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3790                                     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3791                                     unsigned int filter_flags,
3792                                     unsigned int changed_flags);
3793         int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3794                        bool set);
3795         int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
3796                        struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3797                        struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
3798         void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3799                                 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3800                                 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3801                                 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3802                                 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
3803         void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3804                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3805                                struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
3806         void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3807                                         struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
3808         int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3809                        struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
3810         void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3811                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3812         int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3813                                 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3814                                 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
3815                                 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
3816         int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3817                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3818         void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3819                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3820                               const u8 *mac_addr);
3821         void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3822                                  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3823         int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3824                          struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
3825         void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3826                             struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3827                             struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3828         int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3829         int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3830         int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3831                        struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3832         int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3833                           struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3834 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3835         void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3836                                 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3837                                 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3838                                 struct dentry *dir);
3839 #endif
3840         void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3841                         enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3842         int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3843                              struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3844                              struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3845         int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3846                          struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3847                          enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3848                          enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
3849         void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3850                                    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3851                                    struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3852         void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3853                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3854                               struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3855                               u32 changed);
3856         void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3857                                     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3858                                     struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3859         void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3860                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3861                                struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3862                                struct station_info *sinfo);
3863         int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3864                        struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
3865                        const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
3866         u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3867         void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3868                         u64 tsf);
3869         void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3870                            s64 offset);
3871         void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3872         int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3873 
3874         /**
3875          * @ampdu_action:
3876          * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
3877          * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3878          * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3879          * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3880          * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
3881          * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
3882          * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3883          * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3884          * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3885          *
3886          * - ``TX: 1.....7``
3887          * - ``RX:  2....7`` (lost frame #1)
3888          * - ``TX:        8..1...``
3889          *
3890          * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3891          * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3892          *
3893          * - ``TX:        1   or``
3894          * - ``TX:        18  or``
3895          * - ``TX:        81``
3896          *
3897          * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3898          *
3899          * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3900          * The callback can sleep.
3901          */
3902         int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3903                             struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3904                             struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
3905         int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3906                 struct survey_info *survey);
3907         void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3908         void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
3909 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
3910         int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3911                             void *data, int len);
3912         int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3913                              struct netlink_callback *cb,
3914                              void *data, int len);
3915 #endif
3916         void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3917                       u32 queues, bool drop);
3918         void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3919                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3920                                struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
3921         int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3922         int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
3923 
3924         int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3925                                  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3926                                  struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
3927                                  int duration,
3928                                  enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
3929         int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3930                                         struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3931         int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3932         void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3933                               u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
3934         bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3935         int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3936                                 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
3937         void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3938                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3939                                const struct ieee80211_event *event);
3940 
3941         void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3942                                       struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3943                                       u16 tids, int num_frames,
3944                                       enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3945                                       bool more_data);
3946         void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3947                                         struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3948                                         u16 tids, int num_frames,
3949                                         enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3950                                         bool more_data);
3951 
3952         int     (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3953                                      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3954         void    (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3955                                 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3956                                 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3957         void    (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3958                                   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3959                                   u32 sset, u8 *data);
3960 
3961         void    (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3962                                   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3963                                   u16 duration);
3964 
3965         void    (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3966                                              struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3967 
3968         int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3969                            struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3970         void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3971                                struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3972         void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3973                                struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3974                                u32 changed);
3975         int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3976                                   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3977                                   struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3978         void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3979                                      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3980                                      struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3981         int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3982                                   struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3983                                   int n_vifs,
3984                                   enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
3985 
3986         void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3987                                   enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
3988 
3989 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3990         void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3991                                  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3992                                  struct inet6_dev *idev);
3993 #endif
3994         void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3995                                       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3996                                       struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
3997         int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3998                                   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3999                                   struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4000 
4001         int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4002                                    struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4003         void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4004                                      struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4005         void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4006                                          struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4007                                          struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4008 
4009         int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4010         void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4011         u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4012                                        struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4013         int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4014                            int *dbm);
4015 
4016         int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4017                                    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4018                                    struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4019                                    struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4020                                    struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4021         void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4022                                            struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4023                                            struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4024         void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4025                                          struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4026                                          struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4027 
4028         void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4029                               struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4030         void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4031 
4032         int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4033                          struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4034                          struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4035         int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4036                         struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4037         int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4038                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4039                                struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4040         int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4041                             struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4042                             const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4043         void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4044                             struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4045                             u8 instance_id);
4046         bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4047                                        struct sk_buff *head,
4048                                        struct sk_buff *skb);
4049         int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4050                                        struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4051                                        struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4052         int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4053                           struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4054         void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4055                            struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4056 };
4057 
4058 /**
4059  * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4060  *
4061  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4062  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4063  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4064  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4065  * @priv_data_len.
4066  *
4067  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4068  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4069  * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4070  *      NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4071  *
4072  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4073  */
4074 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4075                                            const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4076                                            const char *requested_name);
4077 
4078 /**
4079  * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4080  *
4081  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4082  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4083  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4084  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4085  * @priv_data_len.
4086  *
4087  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4088  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4089  *
4090  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4091  */
4092 static inline
4093 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4094                                         const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4095 {
4096         return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4097 }
4098 
4099 /**
4100  * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4101  *
4102  * You must call this function before any other functions in
4103  * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4104  * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4105  *
4106  * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4107  *
4108  * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4109  */
4110 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4111 
4112 /**
4113  * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4114  * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4115  * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4116  *      (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4117  */
4118 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4119         int throughput;
4120         int blink_time;
4121 };
4122 
4123 /**
4124  * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4125  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4126  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4127  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4128  *      interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4129  */
4130 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4131         IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO          = BIT(0),
4132         IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK           = BIT(1),
4133         IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED      = BIT(2),
4134 };
4135 
4136 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4137 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4138 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4139 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4140 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4141 const char *
4142 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4143                                    unsigned int flags,
4144                                    const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4145                                    unsigned int blink_table_len);
4146 #endif
4147 /**
4148  * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4149  *
4150  * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4151  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4152  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4153  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4154  *
4155  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4156  *
4157  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4158  */
4159 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4160 {
4161 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4162         return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4163 #else
4164         return NULL;
4165 #endif
4166 }
4167 
4168 /**
4169  * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4170  *
4171  * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4172  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4173  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4174  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4175  *
4176  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4177  *
4178  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4179  */
4180 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4181 {
4182 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4183         return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4184 #else
4185         return NULL;
4186 #endif
4187 }
4188 
4189 /**
4190  * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4191  *
4192  * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4193  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4194  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4195  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4196  *
4197  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4198  *
4199  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4200  */
4201 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4202 {
4203 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4204         return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4205 #else
4206         return NULL;
4207 #endif
4208 }
4209 
4210 /**
4211  * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4212  *
4213  * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4214  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4215  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4216  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4217  *
4218  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4219  *
4220  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4221  */
4222 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4223 {
4224 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4225         return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4226 #else
4227         return NULL;
4228 #endif
4229 }
4230 
4231 /**
4232  * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4233  * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4234  * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4235  * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4236  * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4237  *
4238  * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4239  * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4240  *
4241  * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4242  */
4243 static inline const char *
4244 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4245                                  const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4246                                  unsigned int blink_table_len)
4247 {
4248 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4249         return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4250                                                   blink_table_len);
4251 #else
4252         return NULL;
4253 #endif
4254 }
4255 
4256 /**
4257  * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4258  *
4259  * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4260  * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4261  *
4262  * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4263  */
4264 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4265 
4266 /**
4267  * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4268  *
4269  * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4270  * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4271  * before calling this function.
4272  *
4273  * @hw: the hardware to free
4274  */
4275 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4276 
4277 /**
4278  * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4279  *
4280  * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4281  * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4282  * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4283  * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4284  * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4285  * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4286  *
4287  * @hw: the hardware to restart
4288  */
4289 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4290 
4291 /**
4292  * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4293  *
4294  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4295  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4296  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4297  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4298  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4299  *
4300  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4301  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4302  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4303  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4304  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4305  *
4306  * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4307  *
4308  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4309  * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4310  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4311  * @napi: the NAPI context
4312  */
4313 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4314                        struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4315 
4316 /**
4317  * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4318  *
4319  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4320  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4321  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4322  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4323  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4324  *
4325  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4326  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4327  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4328  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4329  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4330  *
4331  * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4332  *
4333  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4334  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4335  */
4336 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4337 {
4338         ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4339 }
4340 
4341 /**
4342  * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4343  *
4344  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4345  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4346  *
4347  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4348  * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4349  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4350  *
4351  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4352  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4353  */
4354 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4355 
4356 /**
4357  * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4358  *
4359  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4360  * (internally disables bottom halves).
4361  *
4362  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4363  * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4364  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4365  *
4366  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4367  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4368  */
4369 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4370                                    struct sk_buff *skb)
4371 {
4372         local_bh_disable();
4373         ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4374         local_bh_enable();
4375 }
4376 
4377 /**
4378  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4379  *
4380  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4381  * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4382  * entering/leaving PS mode.
4383  *
4384  * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4385  *
4386  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4387  * each other.
4388  *
4389  * @sta: currently connected sta
4390  * @start: start or stop PS
4391  *
4392  * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4393  */
4394 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4395 
4396 /**
4397  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4398  *                                  (in process context)
4399  *
4400  * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4401  * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4402  * applies.
4403  *
4404  * @sta: currently connected sta
4405  * @start: start or stop PS
4406  *
4407  * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4408  */
4409 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4410                                                   bool start)
4411 {
4412         int ret;
4413 
4414         local_bh_disable();
4415         ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4416         local_bh_enable();
4417 
4418         return ret;
4419 }
4420 
4421 /**
4422  * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4423  * @sta: currently connected station
4424  *
4425  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4426  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4427  * connected station was received.
4428  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4429  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4430  * be serialized.
4431  */
4432 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4433 
4434 /**
4435  * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4436  * @sta: currently connected station
4437  * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4438  *
4439  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4440  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4441  * from a connected station was received.
4442  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4443  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4444  * serialized.
4445  * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4446  * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4447  * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4448  * checks.
4449  */
4450 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4451 
4452 /*
4453  * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4454  * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4455  */
4456 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM    ALIGN(14, 4)
4457 
4458 /**
4459  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4460  * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4461  * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4462  * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4463  *
4464  * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4465  * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4466  * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4467  *
4468  * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4469  * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4470  * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4471  * call! Beware of the locking!)
4472  *
4473  * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4474  * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4475  * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4476  * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4477  * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4478  * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4479  *
4480  * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4481  * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4482  * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4483  * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4484  * use this API.
4485  */
4486 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4487                                 u8 tid, bool buffered);
4488 
4489 /**
4490  * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4491  *
4492  * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4493  * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4494  * rate selection table for the station entry.
4495  *
4496  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4497  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4498  * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4499  * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4500  * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4501  */
4502 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4503                             struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4504                             struct sk_buff *skb,
4505                             struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4506                             int max_rates);
4507 
4508 /**
4509  * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4510  *
4511  * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4512  * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4513  * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4514  * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4515  * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4516  * slow stations to starve).
4517  *
4518  * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4519  * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4520  */
4521 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4522                                            u32 thr);
4523 
4524 /**
4525  * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
4526  *
4527  * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
4528  * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
4529  * in updating the tx rate in data path.
4530  *
4531  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4532  * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
4533  * @info: tx status information
4534  */
4535 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4536                               struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4537                               struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4538 
4539 /**
4540  * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4541  *
4542  * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4543  * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4544  * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4545  *
4546  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4547  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
4548  * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
4549  * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4550  * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
4551  *
4552  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4553  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4554  */
4555 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4556                          struct sk_buff *skb);
4557 
4558 /**
4559  * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4560  *
4561  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4562  * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4563  * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4564  *
4565  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4566  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4567  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4568  *
4569  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4570  * @status: tx status information
4571  */
4572 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4573                              struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4574 
4575 /**
4576  * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4577  *
4578  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4579  * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4580  * specific skbs.
4581  *
4582  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4583  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4584  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4585  *
4586  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4587  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4588  *      (NULL for multicast packets)
4589  * @info: tx status information
4590  */
4591 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4592                                              struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4593                                              struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4594 {
4595         struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4596                 .sta = sta,
4597                 .info = info,
4598         };
4599 
4600         ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4601 }
4602 
4603 /**
4604  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4605  *
4606  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4607  *
4608  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4609  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4610  * for a single hardware.
4611  *
4612  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4613  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4614  */
4615 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4616                                           struct sk_buff *skb)
4617 {
4618         local_bh_disable();
4619         ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4620         local_bh_enable();
4621 }
4622 
4623 /**
4624  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
4625  *
4626  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4627  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4628  *
4629  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4630  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4631  *
4632  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4633  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4634  */
4635 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4636                                  struct sk_buff *skb);
4637 
4638 /**
4639  * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4640  *
4641  * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4642  * connected STA.
4643  *
4644  * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4645  * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4646  */
4647 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4648 
4649 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4650 
4651 /**
4652  * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4653  * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4654  * @tim_length: size of TIM element
4655  * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4656  *      to CSA counters.  This array can contain zero values which
4657  *      should be ignored.
4658  */
4659 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4660         u16 tim_offset;
4661         u16 tim_length;
4662 
4663         u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
4664 };
4665 
4666 /**
4667  * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4668  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4669  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4670  * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4671  *      receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4672  *
4673  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4674  * obtain the beacon template.
4675  *
4676  * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4677  * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
4678  * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4679  * applicable, the CSA count.
4680  *
4681  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4682  *
4683  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4684  */
4685 struct sk_buff *
4686 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4687                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4688                               struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4689 
4690 /**
4691  * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4692  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4693  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4694  * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4695  *      Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4696  * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4697  *      (including the ID and length bytes!).
4698  *      Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4699  *
4700  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4701  * obtain the beacon frame.
4702  *
4703  * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4704  * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
4705  * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4706  * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
4707  *
4708  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4709  *
4710  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4711  */
4712 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4713                                          struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4714                                          u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4715 
4716 /**
4717  * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4718  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4719  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4720  *
4721  * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4722  *
4723  * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4724  */
4725 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4726                                                    struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4727 {
4728         return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4729 }
4730 
4731 /**
4732  * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4733  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4734  *
4735  * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4736  * This function is called implicitly when
4737  * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4738  * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4739  * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4740  *
4741  * Return: new csa counter value
4742  */
4743 u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4744 
4745 /**
4746  * ieee80211_csa_set_counter - request mac80211 to set csa counter
4747  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4748  * @counter: the new value for the counter
4749  *
4750  * The csa counter can be changed by the device, this API should be
4751  * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
4752  *
4753  * It should never be used together with ieee80211_csa_update_counter(),
4754  * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
4755  */
4756 void ieee80211_csa_set_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
4757 
4758 /**
4759  * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4760  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4761  *
4762  * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
4763  * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
4764  * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4765  */
4766 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4767 
4768 /**
4769  * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
4770  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4771  *
4772  * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4773  */
4774 bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4775 
4776 
4777 /**
4778  * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4779  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4780  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4781  *
4782  * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4783  * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4784  *
4785  * Can only be called in AP mode.
4786  *
4787  * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
4788  */
4789 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4790                                         struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4791 
4792 /**
4793  * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4794  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4795  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4796  *
4797  * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4798  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4799  * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4800  *
4801  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4802  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
4803  *
4804  * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
4805  */
4806 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4807                                      struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4808 
4809 /**
4810  * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4811  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4812  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4813  * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
4814  *      if at all possible
4815  *
4816  * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4817  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4818  * BSSID and address is used.
4819  *
4820  * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
4821  * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
4822  *
4823  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4824  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
4825  *
4826  * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
4827  */
4828 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4829                                        struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4830                                        bool qos_ok);
4831 
4832 /**
4833  * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4834  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4835  * @src_addr: source MAC address
4836  * @ssid: SSID buffer
4837  * @ssid_len: length of SSID
4838  * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
4839  *
4840  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4841  * hardware.
4842  *
4843  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
4844  */
4845 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4846                                        const u8 *src_addr,
4847                                        const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
4848                                        size_t tailroom);
4849 
4850 /**
4851  * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4852  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4853  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4854  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4855  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4856  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4857  * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4858  *
4859  * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4860  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4861  * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4862  * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4863  */
4864 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4865                        const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4866                        const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4867                        struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4868 
4869 /**
4870  * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4871  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4872  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4873  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4874  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4875  *
4876  * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4877  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4878  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4879  *
4880  * Return: The duration.
4881  */
4882 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4883                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
4884                               const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4885 
4886 /**
4887  * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4888  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4889  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4890  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4891  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4892  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4893  * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4894  *
4895  * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4896  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4897  * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4898  * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4899  */
4900 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4901                              struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4902                              const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4903                              const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4904                              struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4905 
4906 /**
4907  * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4908  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4909  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4910  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4911  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4912  *
4913  * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4914  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4915  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4916  *
4917  * Return: The duration.
4918  */
4919 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4920                                     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4921                                     size_t frame_len,
4922                                     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4923 
4924 /**
4925  * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4926  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4927  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4928  * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
4929  * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
4930  * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
4931  *
4932  * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4933  * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
4934  *
4935  * Return: The duration.
4936  */
4937 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4938                                         struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4939                                         enum nl80211_band band,
4940                                         size_t frame_len,
4941                                         struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
4942 
4943 /**
4944  * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4945  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4946  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4947  *
4948  * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4949  * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4950  * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4951  * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
4952  * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4953  *
4954  * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4955  * frames are available.
4956  *
4957  * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4958  * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4959  * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4960  * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4961  * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4962  * use common code for all beacons.
4963  */
4964 struct sk_buff *
4965 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4966 
4967 /**
4968  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4969  *
4970  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4971  *
4972  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4973  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4974  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4975  */
4976 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4977                                u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4978 
4979 /**
4980  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
4981  *
4982  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4983  * from the given packet.
4984  *
4985  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4986  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4987  *      with this P1K
4988  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4989  */
4990 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4991                                           struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4992 {
4993         struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4994         const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4995         u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4996 
4997         ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4998 }
4999 
5000 /**
5001  * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
5002  *
5003  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
5004  * and transmitter address.
5005  *
5006  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5007  * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
5008  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5009  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5010  */
5011 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5012                                const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5013 
5014 /**
5015  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5016  *
5017  * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5018  * in the packet.
5019  *
5020  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5021  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5022  *      encrypted with this key
5023  * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5024  */
5025 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5026                             struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5027 
5028 /**
5029  * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5030  *
5031  * @pos: start of crypto header
5032  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5033  * @pn: PN to add
5034  *
5035  * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5036  * the packet payload)
5037  *
5038  * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5039  * point to the crypto header)
5040  */
5041 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5042 
5043 /**
5044  * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5045  *
5046  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5047  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5048  *      the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5049  *      CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5050  * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5051  *
5052  * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5053  * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5054  * by the device and not by mac80211.
5055  *
5056  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5057  * can be done concurrently.
5058  */
5059 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5060                               int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5061 
5062 /**
5063  * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5064  *
5065  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5066  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5067  *      the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5068  *      CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5069  * @seq: new sequence data
5070  *
5071  * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5072  * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5073  * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5074  * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5075  *
5076  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5077  * can be done concurrently.
5078  */
5079 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5080                               int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5081 
5082 /**
5083  * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5084  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5085  *
5086  * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5087  * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5088  * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5089  *
5090  * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5091  * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5092  */
5093 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5094 
5095 /**
5096  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5097  * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5098  * @keyconf: new key data
5099  *
5100  * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5101  * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5102  * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5103  *
5104  * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5105  * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5106  * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5107  * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5108  *
5109  * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5110  * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5111  * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5112  * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5113  * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5114  * of the reconfiguration.
5115  *
5116  * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5117  * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5118  *
5119  * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5120  * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5121  * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5122  * the key that's being replaced.
5123  */
5124 struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5125 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5126                         struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5127 
5128 /**
5129  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5130  * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5131  * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5132  * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5133  * @gfp: allocation flags
5134  */
5135 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5136                                 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5137 
5138 /**
5139  * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5140  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5141  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5142  *
5143  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5144  */
5145 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5146 
5147 /**
5148  * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5149  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5150  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5151  *
5152  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5153  */
5154 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5155 
5156 /**
5157  * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5158  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5159  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5160  *
5161  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5162  *
5163  * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5164  */
5165 
5166 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5167 
5168 /**
5169  * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5170  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5171  *
5172  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5173  */
5174 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5175 
5176 /**
5177  * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5178  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5179  *
5180  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5181  */
5182 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5183 
5184 /**
5185  * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5186  *
5187  * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5188  * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5189  * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5190  * any context, including hardirq context.
5191  *
5192  * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5193  * @info: information about the completed scan
5194  */
5195 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5196                               struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5197 
5198 /**
5199  * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5200  *
5201  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5202  * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5203  *
5204  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5205  */
5206 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5207 
5208 /**
5209  * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5210  *
5211  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5212  * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5213  * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5214  * while associating, for instance.
5215  *
5216  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5217  */
5218 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5219 
5220 /**
5221  * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5222  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5223  *      been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5224  *      reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5225  *      interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5226  *      haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5227  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5228  *      interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5229  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5230  */
5231 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5232         IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL     = 0,
5233         IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
5234         IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE     = BIT(1),
5235 };
5236 
5237 /**
5238  * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5239  *
5240  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5241  * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5242  * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5243  * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5244  *
5245  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5246  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5247  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5248  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5249  */
5250 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5251                                   void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5252                                                    struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5253                                   void *data);
5254 
5255 /**
5256  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5257  *
5258  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5259  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5260  * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5261  * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5262  * be used.
5263  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5264  *
5265  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5266  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5267  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5268  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5269  */
5270 static inline void
5271 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5272                                     void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5273                                                      struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5274                                     void *data)
5275 {
5276         ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5277                                      iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5278                                      iterator, data);
5279 }
5280 
5281 /**
5282  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5283  *
5284  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5285  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5286  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5287  * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5288  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5289  *
5290  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5291  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5292  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5293  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5294  */
5295 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5296                                                 u32 iter_flags,
5297                                                 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5298                                                     u8 *mac,
5299                                                     struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5300                                                 void *data);
5301 
5302 /**
5303  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
5304  *
5305  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5306  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5307  * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
5308  *
5309  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5310  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5311  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5312  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5313  */
5314 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5315                                               u32 iter_flags,
5316                                               void (*iterator)(void *data,
5317                                                 u8 *mac,
5318                                                 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5319                                               void *data);
5320 
5321 /**
5322  * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5323  *
5324  * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5325  * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5326  * function for them.
5327  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5328  *
5329  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5330  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5331  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5332  */
5333 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5334                                        void (*iterator)(void *data,
5335                                                 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5336                                        void *data);
5337 /**
5338  * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5339  *
5340  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5341  * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5342  *
5343  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5344  * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5345  */
5346 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5347 
5348 /**
5349  * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5350  *
5351  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5352  * workqueue.
5353  *
5354  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5355  * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5356  * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5357  */
5358 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5359                                   struct delayed_work *dwork,
5360                                   unsigned long delay);
5361 
5362 /**
5363  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5364  * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5365  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5366  * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5367  *
5368  * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5369  *
5370  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5371  * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5372  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5373  */
5374 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5375                                   u16 timeout);
5376 
5377 /**
5378  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5379  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5380  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5381  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5382  *
5383  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5384  * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5385  * from any context.
5386  */
5387 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5388                                       u16 tid);
5389 
5390 /**
5391  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5392  * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5393  * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5394  *
5395  * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5396  *
5397  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5398  * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5399  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5400  */
5401 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5402 
5403 /**
5404  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5405  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5406  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5407  * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5408  *
5409  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5410  * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5411  * can be called from any context.
5412  */
5413 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5414                                      u16 tid);
5415 
5416 /**
5417  * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5418  *
5419  * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5420  * @addr: station's address
5421  *
5422  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5423  *
5424  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5425  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5426  */
5427 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5428                                          const u8 *addr);
5429 
5430 /**
5431  * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
5432  *
5433  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5434  * @addr: remote station's address
5435  * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
5436  *
5437  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5438  *
5439  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5440  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5441  *
5442  * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5443  *      the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5444  *      We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5445  *      logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5446  *      BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5447  *      In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5448  *      is not reliable.
5449  *
5450  * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
5451  */
5452 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5453                                                const u8 *addr,
5454                                                const u8 *localaddr);
5455 
5456 /**
5457  * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5458  * @hw: the hardware
5459  * @pubsta: the station
5460  * @block: whether to block or unblock
5461  *
5462  * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5463  * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5464  * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5465  * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5466  * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5467  *
5468  * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5469  * manner.
5470  *
5471  * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5472  * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5473  * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5474  * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5475  * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5476  * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5477  * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5478  * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5479  * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5480  * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5481  * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5482  * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5483  * woke up while blocked or not.
5484  */
5485 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5486                                struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5487 
5488 /**
5489  * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5490  * @pubsta: the station
5491  *
5492  * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5493  * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5494  * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5495  * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5496  *
5497  * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5498  * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5499  * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5500  * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5501  *
5502  * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5503  *     driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5504  *     you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5505  *     and restore the _irqsafe version!
5506  */
5507 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
5508 
5509 /**
5510  * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5511  * @pubsta: the station
5512  * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5513  *
5514  * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5515  * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5516  * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5517  * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5518  * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5519  * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5520  * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5521  * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5522  * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5523  * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5524  * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5525  * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5526  * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5527  * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5528  */
5529 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5530 
5531 /**
5532  * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
5533  *
5534  * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver can call
5535  * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
5536  * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
5537  * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
5538  *
5539  * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
5540  * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
5541  * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
5542  * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
5543  * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
5544  * attempts.
5545  *
5546  * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
5547  * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
5548  * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
5549  * them to 0.
5550  *
5551  * @pubsta: the station
5552  * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
5553  * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
5554  * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
5555  */
5556 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5557                                     u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
5558 
5559 /**
5560  * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5561  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5562  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5563  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5564  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5565  *
5566  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5567  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5568  * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5569  * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5570  * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5571  * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
5572  *
5573  * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5574  * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5575  * set_key callback.
5576  */
5577 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5578                          struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5579                          void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5580                                       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5581                                       struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5582                                       struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5583                                       void *data),
5584                          void *iter_data);
5585 
5586 /**
5587  * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5588  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5589  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5590  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5591  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5592  *
5593  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5594  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5595  * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5596  * in removal process will be skipped.
5597  *
5598  * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5599  * and thus iter must be atomic.
5600  */
5601 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5602                              struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5603                              void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5604                                           struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5605                                           struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5606                                           struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5607                                           void *data),
5608                              void *iter_data);
5609 
5610 /**
5611  * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5612  * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5613  * @iter: iterator function
5614  * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5615  *
5616  * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5617  * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5618  * places while calling into the driver.
5619  *
5620  * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5621  * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5622  * removed.
5623  *
5624  * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5625  * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5626  * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5627  * or not.
5628  */
5629 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5630         struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5631         void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5632                      struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5633                      void *data),
5634         void *iter_data);
5635 
5636 /**
5637  * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5638  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5639  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5640  *
5641  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5642  * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5643  * information. This function must only be called from within the
5644  * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5645  * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
5646  * %NULL.
5647  *
5648  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5649  */
5650 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5651                                           struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5652 
5653 /**
5654  * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5655  *
5656  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5657  *
5658  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
5659  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
5660  * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5661  */
5662 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5663 
5664 /**
5665  * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5666  *
5667  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5668  *
5669  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
5670  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5671  * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
5672  * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5673  * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
5674  *
5675  * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5676  * without connection recovery attempts.
5677  */
5678 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5679 
5680 /**
5681  * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5682  *
5683  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5684  *
5685  * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5686  * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5687  * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5688  * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5689  * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5690  *
5691  * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5692  * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5693  * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5694  * disconnect normally later.
5695  *
5696  * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5697  * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5698  * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5699  * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5700  */
5701 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5702 
5703 /**
5704  * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5705  *      rssi threshold triggered
5706  *
5707  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5708  * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5709  * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
5710  * @gfp: context flags
5711  *
5712  * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
5713  * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5714  * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5715  */
5716 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5717                                enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5718                                s32 rssi_level,
5719                                gfp_t gfp);
5720 
5721 /**
5722  * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5723  *
5724  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5725  * @gfp: context flags
5726  */
5727 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5728 
5729 /**
5730  * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5731  *
5732  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5733  */
5734 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5735 
5736 /**
5737  * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5738  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5739  * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5740  *
5741  * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5742  * and wake up the suspended queues.
5743  */
5744 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5745 
5746 /**
5747  * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5748  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5749  * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
5750  *
5751  * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5752  * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5753  * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5754  */
5755 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5756                             enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5757 
5758 /**
5759  * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5760  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5761  */
5762 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5763 
5764 /**
5765  * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5766  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5767  */
5768 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5769 
5770 /**
5771  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5772  *
5773  * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5774  * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5775  * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5776  * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5777  * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5778  * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5779  *
5780  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5781  * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5782  * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5783  */
5784 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5785                                   const u8 *addr);
5786 
5787 /**
5788  * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5789  * @pubsta: station struct
5790  * @tid: the session's TID
5791  * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5792  *      assumed to be out of the window after the call
5793  * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5794  * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5795  *
5796  * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5797  * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5798  * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5799  * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5800  */
5801 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5802                                           u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5803                                           u16 received_mpdus);
5804 
5805 /**
5806  * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5807  *
5808  * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5809  * buffer.
5810  *
5811  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5812  * @ra: the peer's destination address
5813  * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5814  * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5815  */
5816 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5817 
5818 /**
5819  * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
5820  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5821  * @addr: station mac address
5822  * @tid: the rx tid
5823  */
5824 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
5825                                  unsigned int tid);
5826 
5827 /**
5828  * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5829  *
5830  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5831  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5832  * reordering.
5833  *
5834  * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5835  * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5836  *
5837  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5838  * @addr: station mac address
5839  * @tid: the rx tid
5840  */
5841 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5842                                                       const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5843 {
5844         if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5845                 return;
5846         ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
5847 }
5848 
5849 /**
5850  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5851  *
5852  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5853  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5854  * reordering.
5855  *
5856  * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5857  * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5858  *
5859  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5860  * @addr: station mac address
5861  * @tid: the rx tid
5862  */
5863 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5864                                                      const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5865 {
5866         if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5867                 return;
5868         ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
5869 }
5870 
5871 /**
5872  * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
5873  *
5874  * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
5875  * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
5876  *
5877  * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
5878  *
5879  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5880  * @addr: station mac address
5881  * @tid: the rx tid
5882  */
5883 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5884                                    const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
5885 
5886 /* Rate control API */
5887 
5888 /**
5889  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
5890  *
5891  * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5892  * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5893  * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
5894  * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5895  *      to be filled in
5896  * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5897  *      which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5898  *      used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5899  * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5900  *      RTS threshold
5901  * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5902  *      if the selected rate supports it
5903  * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
5904  * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
5905  * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
5906  */
5907 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5908         struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5909         struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5910         struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5911         struct sk_buff *skb;
5912         struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5913         bool rts, short_preamble;
5914         u32 rate_idx_mask;
5915         u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
5916         bool bss;
5917 };
5918 
5919 /**
5920  * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
5921  */
5922 enum rate_control_capabilities {
5923         /**
5924          * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
5925          * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
5926          * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
5927          * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
5928          * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
5929          */
5930         RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
5931 };
5932 
5933 struct rate_control_ops {
5934         unsigned long capa;
5935         const char *name;
5936         void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5937         void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv,
5938                             struct dentry *debugfsdir);
5939         void (*free)(void *priv);
5940 
5941         void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5942         void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5943                           struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
5944                           struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
5945         void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5946                             struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
5947                             struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5948                             u32 changed);
5949         void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5950                          void *priv_sta);
5951 
5952         void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
5953                               struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5954                               void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
5955         void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5956                           struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5957                           struct sk_buff *skb);
5958         void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5959                          struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5960 
5961         void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5962                                 struct dentry *dir);
5963 
5964         u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
5965 };
5966 
5967 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5968                                  enum nl80211_band band,
5969                                  int index)
5970 {
5971         return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5972 }
5973 
5974 static inline s8
5975 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5976                   struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5977 {
5978         int i;
5979 
5980         for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5981                 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5982                         return i;
5983 
5984         /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
5985         WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
5986 
5987         /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
5988         return 0;
5989 }
5990 
5991 static inline
5992 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5993                               struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5994 {
5995         unsigned int i;
5996 
5997         for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5998                 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5999                         return true;
6000         return false;
6001 }
6002 
6003 /**
6004  * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6005  *
6006  * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6007  * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6008  * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6009  * the most recent rate control module decision.
6010  *
6011  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6012  * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6013  * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6014  */
6015 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6016                            struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6017                            struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6018 
6019 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6020 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6021 
6022 static inline bool
6023 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6024 {
6025         return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6026 }
6027 
6028 static inline bool
6029 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6030 {
6031         return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6032                conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6033 }
6034 
6035 static inline bool
6036 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6037 {
6038         return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6039                conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6040 }
6041 
6042 static inline bool
6043 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6044 {
6045         return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6046 }
6047 
6048 static inline bool
6049 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6050 {
6051         return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6052                 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6053                 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6054 }
6055 
6056 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6057 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6058 {
6059         if (p2p) {
6060                 switch (type) {
6061                 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6062                         return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6063                 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6064                         return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6065                 default:
6066                         break;
6067                 }
6068         }
6069         return type;
6070 }
6071 
6072 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6073 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6074 {
6075         return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6076 }
6077 
6078 /**
6079  * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6080  *
6081  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6082  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6083  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6084  *
6085  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6086  * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6087  * matching GroupId management frame.
6088  * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6089  */
6090 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6091                                 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6092 
6093 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6094                                    int rssi_min_thold,
6095                                    int rssi_max_thold);
6096 
6097 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6098 
6099 /**
6100  * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6101  *
6102  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6103  *
6104  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6105  *
6106  * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6107  * applicable.
6108  */
6109 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6110 
6111 /**
6112  * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6113  * @vif: virtual interface
6114  * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6115  * @gfp: allocation flags
6116  *
6117  * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6118  */
6119 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6120                                     struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6121                                     gfp_t gfp);
6122 
6123 /**
6124  * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6125  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6126  * @vif: virtual interface
6127  * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6128  * @band: the band to transmit on
6129  * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6130  *
6131  * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6132  */
6133 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6134                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6135                               int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6136 
6137 /**
6138  * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6139  *
6140  * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6141  * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6142  *
6143  * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6144  *
6145  * private:
6146  *
6147  * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6148  * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6149  */
6150 struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6151         u32 next_tsf;
6152         bool has_next_tsf;
6153 
6154         u8 absent;
6155 
6156         u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6157         struct {
6158                 u32 start;
6159                 u32 duration;
6160                 u32 interval;
6161         } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6162 };
6163 
6164 /**
6165  * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6166  *
6167  * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6168  * @data: NoA tracking data
6169  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6170  *
6171  * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6172  */
6173 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6174                             struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6175 
6176 /**
6177  * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6178  *
6179  * @data: NoA tracking data
6180  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6181  */
6182 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6183 
6184 /**
6185  * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6186  * @vif: virtual interface
6187  * @peer: the peer's destination address
6188  * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6189  * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6190  * @gfp: allocation flags
6191  *
6192  * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6193  */
6194 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6195                                  enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6196                                  u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6197 
6198 /**
6199  * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6200  *
6201  * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6202  * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6203  * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6204  * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6205  * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6206  * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6207  *
6208  * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6209  * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6210  * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6211  *
6212  * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6213  * @tid: the TID to reserve
6214  *
6215  * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6216  */
6217 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6218 
6219 /**
6220  * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6221  *
6222  * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6223  * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6224  * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6225  *
6226  * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6227  * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6228  * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6229  *
6230  * @sta: the station
6231  * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6232  */
6233 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6234 
6235 /**
6236  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6237  *
6238  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6239  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6240  *      ieee80211_next_txq()
6241  *
6242  * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6243  *
6244  * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6245  * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6246  * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by by RCU and thus the
6247  * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6248  * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6249  * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6250  * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6251  *
6252  * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
6253  * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
6254  */
6255 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6256                                      struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6257 
6258 /**
6259  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6260  * (in process context)
6261  *
6262  * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
6263  * (internally disables bottom halves).
6264  *
6265  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6266  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6267  *      ieee80211_next_txq()
6268  */
6269 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6270                                                       struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6271 {
6272         struct sk_buff *skb;
6273 
6274         local_bh_disable();
6275         skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
6276         local_bh_enable();
6277 
6278         return skb;
6279 }
6280 
6281 /**
6282  * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6283  *
6284  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6285  * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6286  *
6287  * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6288  * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6289  * driver has finished scheduling it.
6290  */
6291 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6292 
6293 /**
6294  * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6295  *
6296  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6297  * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6298  *
6299  * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6300  * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6301  */
6302 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6303 
6304 /* (deprecated) */
6305 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6306 {
6307 }
6308 
6309 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6310                               struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force);
6311 
6312 /**
6313  * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6314  *
6315  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6316  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6317  *
6318  * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
6319  * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
6320  *
6321  * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
6322  * this TXQ internally.
6323  */
6324 static inline void
6325 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6326 {
6327         __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true);
6328 }
6329 
6330 /**
6331  * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
6332  *
6333  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6334  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6335  * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
6336  *
6337  * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
6338  * internally.
6339  */
6340 static inline void
6341 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6342                      bool force)
6343 {
6344         __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force);
6345 }
6346 
6347 /**
6348  * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
6349  *
6350  * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
6351  * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
6352  * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
6353  * next_txq().
6354  *
6355  * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
6356  * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
6357  * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
6358  * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
6359  * again.
6360  *
6361  * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
6362  * aligned aginst driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
6363  * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
6364  * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
6365  * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
6366  * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
6367  *
6368  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6369  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6370  */
6371 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6372                                 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6373 
6374 /**
6375  * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
6376  *
6377  * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
6378  * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
6379  * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
6380  *
6381  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6382  * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6383  * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6384  */
6385 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6386                              unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6387                              unsigned long *byte_cnt);
6388 
6389 /**
6390  * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6391  *
6392  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6393  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6394  *
6395  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6396  * @inst_id: the local instance id
6397  * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6398  * @gfp: allocation flags
6399  */
6400 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6401                                    u8 inst_id,
6402                                    enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6403                                    gfp_t gfp);
6404 
6405 /**
6406  * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6407  *
6408  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6409  * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6410  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6411  *
6412  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6413  * @match: match event information
6414  * @gfp: allocation flags
6415  */
6416 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6417                               struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6418                               gfp_t gfp);
6419 
6420 #endif /* MAC80211_H */

/* [<][>][^][v][top][bottom][index][help] */